0% found this document useful (0 votes)
106 views316 pages

LightSpeed Series Technical Reference Manual - UM - 5478900-2-1EN - 3

Uploaded by

Andrew Sinyagin
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
106 views316 pages

LightSpeed Series Technical Reference Manual - UM - 5478900-2-1EN - 3

Uploaded by

Andrew Sinyagin
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 316

GE Healthcare

LightSpeedTM Series
Technical Reference Manual
GE Hangwei Medical Systems does business as GE Healthcare

This Manual Supports the Following Product Names:

LightSpeed Plus
LightSpeed Ultra
LightSpeed16

LightSpeedTM Series
Technical Reference Manual, English
original draft in English
5478900-2-1EN
Revision: 3
© 2016 General Electric Company
All rights reserved.
REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE


1 May 2013 Initial Release
2 November 2013 Information Update
3 October 2016 Information Update

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) i-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

i-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
REVISION HISTORY................................................................................................................................ i-1

Chapter 1: Before You Start


User Information Description ................................................................................................1-2
Applications Help.........................................................................................................................1-2

Chapter 2: X-ray Protection

Chapter 3: Safety
Introduction............................................................................................................................................3-1
What Do I Need to Know About....................................................................................................3-3
Warning Labels and Symbols................................................................................................3-3
Equipment Warning Labels ............................................................................................3-9
General Safety Guidelines .................................................................................................... 3-12
Implantable Device Safety........................................................................................... 3-14
Radiation Safety........................................................................................................................ 3-15
Authorized Users .............................................................................................................. 3-16
General Radiation Safety.............................................................................................. 3-16
Scans Acquired at the Same Tomographic Plane ............................................ 3-17
Geometric Efficiency....................................................................................................... 3-18
CTDIvol .................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Pediatric and Small Patient Imaging....................................................................... 3-19
X-Ray Tubes........................................................................................................................ 3-19
Electrical Safety ................................................................................................... 3-20
Mechanical Safety.................................................................................................................... 3-22
General Mechanical Safety ......................................................................................... 3-22
Short Footprint Mode ..................................................................................................... 3-22
Patient Positioning........................................................................................................... 3-23
Table capacity ................................................................................................................... 3-23
Laser Safety (Reference 21CFR 1040.10 (h))................................................................. 3-27
Reconstructed Image Orientation.................................................................................... 3-27
Data Safety.................................................................................................................................. 3-29
Application Software Safety................................................................................................ 3-32
Application Specific Safety Topics.................................................................................... 3-32
Helical Scanning ............................................................................................................... 3-32
Cardiac Imaging ............................................................................................................... 3-33
Patient Preparation ......................................................................................................... 3-34
Lung Algorithm.................................................................................................................. 3-35
Autoscan .............................................................................................................................. 3-36

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) TOC-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

SmartStep/SmartView Safety..................................................................................... 3-36


Interventional / Biopsy Scanning.............................................................................. 3-37
Advanced Applications Safety ................................................................................... 3-38
Segment Tools ................................................................................................................... 3-40
Filming and Saving Images ......................................................................................... 3-40
Image reliability................................................................................................................. 3-41
Window Width and Level (W/L).................................................................................. 3-41
Volume Rendering ........................................................................................................... 3-41
Image quality ..................................................................................................................... 3-42
Accuracy of Measurements ................................................................................................ 3-42
Measure Distance for Axial, Helical, and Cine Images ................................... 3-42
Measure Distance for Scout Images....................................................................... 3-42
Measure Angle................................................................................................................... 3-44
ROI........................................................................................................................................... 3-44
Reformat Plane Thickness............................................................................................ 3-44
Operator Console Ergonomics ........................................................................................... 3-44
Posture .................................................................................................................................. 3-45
Equipment Adjustments................................................................................................ 3-45
Accessories.................................................................................................................................. 3-46
GE Approved Accessories............................................................................................. 3-47
IV Pole Safety...................................................................................................................... 3-48
Table Tray Safety.............................................................................................................. 3-49
Systems With Metal-Free Cradles and Accessories......................................... 3-50
Xtream/Enhanced Xtream Injector Safety ........................................................... 3-50
Limited Access Room Configuration....................................................................... 3-51
Emergency Devices and Emergency Egress ............................................................... 3-51
Emergency Devices......................................................................................................... 3-51
Emergency Stop................................................................................................................ 3-51
Emergency Stop Button Symbols ............................................................................. 3-54
System Emergency OFF Buttons using Main Disconnect Control............. 3-54
Emergency Patient Care During X-Ray ON: ......................................................... 3-54
Emergency Egress ........................................................................................................... 3-55
Maintenance and Cleaning.................................................................................................. 3-56
Cleaning Equipment (Bio Hazard) ..................................................................................... 3-57
Environmental Concerns ...................................................................................................... 3-57
Name and Concentration of Hazardous Substances ............................................. 3-58
Explanation of Pollution Control Label................................................................... 3-58
Precautions ......................................................................................................................... 3-60
................................................................................................................................................................... 3-60

Chapter 4: Accessing the Learning and Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tube Warmup

Chapter 6: Daily Fast Cal Procedure

TOC-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7: Prepare the System

Chapter 8: Check Disk Space


Check Image Space....................................................................................................................8-1

Chapter 9: Reset the System


System Shutdown/Reset Procedures ................................................................................9-1

Chapter 10: Stop/Start the Operating System


Shutdown System. ................................................................................................................... 10-1
If You Turn OFF the MDC at the End of the Scan Day:............................................. 10-5
For Systems with UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply).............................................. 10-5

Chapter 11: General Information


System components:...................................................................................................... 11-1
Emergency Stop:............................................................................................................... 11-1
CT Description............................................................................................................................ 11-1
CT Operation Theory ............................................................................................................... 11-2
DICOM Print................................................................................................................................. 11-2
X-Ray .............................................................................................................................................. 11-2
Tube Warmup ........................................................................................................................... 11-3
LightSpeed Series Theory of Operation ......................................................................... 11-3
System Characteristics.................................................................................................. 11-3
Network......................................................................................................................................... 11-7
DICOM IEC Network Form.................................................................................................. 11-10
Purpose of LightSpeed scanner connection to network ............................ 11-10
Network interface technical specifications ...................................................... 11-11
Network information flows specifications......................................................... 11-11
Required characteristics and configuration of network
for support of LightSpeed Scanner specifications ........................................ 11-15
System Data and Control Flow ....................................................................................... 11-15
X-ray Generation and Detection Details .................................................................... 11-16
System Operational Modes .............................................................................................. 11-20
Current X-Ray Tube Capacity Effects Prescriptions and Interscan Delays 11-24
Focal Spot ................................................................................................................................ 11-24
Filament Selection ............................................................................................................... 11-24
Data Collection ....................................................................................................................... 11-25
Reconstruction ....................................................................................................................... 11-26
Helical Scan Data Usage ................................................................................................... 11-27
Channel Utilization Table-Full Modes........................................................................... 11-27
Channel Utilization Table-Plus Modes ......................................................................... 11-28

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) TOC-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Slice Thickness Full Mode .................................................................................................. 11-28


Slice Thickness Plus Mode ................................................................................................. 11-29
Cardiac Helical Slice Profiles.................................................................................... 11-29
Calibration Scans ................................................................................................................. 11-30
Warm-up Required............................................................................................................... 11-30
Data Storage ........................................................................................................................... 11-30
NIO16 console ................................................................................................................ 11-30
GOC4 console.................................................................................................................. 11-31
Image Display ......................................................................................................................... 11-31
Gray Scale................................................................................................................................. 11-31
CT Number................................................................................................................................ 11-32
Variables You Cannot Control ........................................................................................ 11-33
Pixels............................................................................................................................................ 11-33
Pixel Coordinates .................................................................................................................. 11-33
RAS Coordinates .................................................................................................................... 11-34
Pixels and CT Numbers ...................................................................................................... 11-36
Window Width ........................................................................................................................ 11-37
Window Level .......................................................................................................................... 11-37

Chapter 12: Quality Assurance


QA Phantom (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (d)(1)) ........................................................... 12-1
QA Schedule (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (d)(2))................................................... 12-3
Handling the QA Phantom........................................................................................... 12-4
System Performance (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (d)(2)) ................................. 12-5
High Contrast Spatial Resolution.............................................................................. 12-8
MTF (optional)..................................................................................................................... 12-9
Noise and Uniformity (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (j)) .................................... 12-11
Analyze the Slice Thickness in Images ................................................................ 12-15
Alignment Light Accuracy (Reference 21CFR 1020.33(g)(2)) .................... 12-15
Prescribe the QA Series for Alignment Light Accuracy -
Phantom Section #1 .................................................................................................... 12-16
Typical Results and Allowable Variations .......................................................... 12-18
DOSIMETRY ............................................................................................................................... 12-19
General Information .................................................................................................... 12-19
CTDIw (Reference IEC 60601-2-44 and 21 CFR 1020.33 (c))...................... 12-21
CTDIvol (Reference IEC 60601-2-44) .................................................................... 12-26
Peak Skin Dose ....................................................................................................................... 12-28
Deterministic effect (refer to IEC60601-2-44:2009 Clause 203.5.2.4.5) ....... 12-31
Other Dosimetry Information........................................................................................... 12-32
Dose Length Product (DLP) ....................................................................................... 12-32
Dose Efficiency (Reference IEC 60601-2-44) .................................................... 12-32
Scout Dose ....................................................................................................................... 12-33
Phantoms for Performance Testing (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(3)(v))..... 12-33

TOC-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Noise ................................................................................................................................... 12-34
Noise ................................................................................................................................... 12-34
Representative Images (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (d)(3)(i))............................... 12-35
Nominal Slice Thickness (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(3)(iii))................... 12-37
Sensitivity Profile (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(3)(iv)).................................. 12-37
Modulation Transfer Function (MTF) (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(3)(ii)) .... 12-42
Maximum Deviation (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)).............................................. 12-43
Tomographic section thickness ............................................................................. 12-43
Typical Dose (Reference IEC 60601-2-44 and 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(2)(v)) 12-44
Dose Profile (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(2)(v)) ............................................. 12-44
Performance (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(3)(v))........................................... 12-44
Frequency of constancy tests (Reference IEC 61223-2-6 section 4.7)......... 12-44
Radiation Protection ............................................................................................................ 12-45

Chapter 13: CT Acceptance Testing


Positioning of The Patient Support................................................................................... 13-1
Patient Positioning Accuracy .............................................................................................. 13-2
Internal/external Laser Light Accuracy; Preview
Tomographic Accuracy; Sagittal and Coronal Light Accuracy Test......... 13-2
Tomographic Section Thickness........................................................................................ 13-7
Tomographic Section Thickness for Axial Scan ................................................. 13-7
Tomographic Section Thickness for Helical Scan .......................................... 13-14
Dose............................................................................................................................................. 13-14
Scan Protocols and Dose Specifications for CTDIw ...................................... 13-14
Scan Protocols and Dose Specifications for CTDIfree air........................... 13-15
Noise, Mean CT Number and Uniformity.................................................................... 13-17
Test Equipment .............................................................................................................. 13-18
Test Procedure ............................................................................................................... 13-18
Expected Results and Variations for Noise, Mean CT number
and Uniformity................................................................................................................ 13-18
Spatial Resolution.................................................................................................................. 13-18
Test Equipment .............................................................................................................. 13-19
Test Procedure and Data Evaluation................................................................... 13-19
Expected Results and Tolerance............................................................................ 13-20
Low Contrast Resolution (or low contrast detectability (LCD)) ......................... 13-21
Test Equipment .............................................................................................................. 13-21
Test Procedure and Data Evaluation Using Catphan 600 ......................... 13-21
Expected Results and Variations ........................................................................... 13-23

Chapter 14: X-Ray Tube Specifications


Performix Ultra X-Ray Tube MAXIRay CT ULTRA X-Ray Tube....................................... 14-1
Environmental Specifications ............................................................................................. 14-2
Non-Operating Environment (Reference IEC 60601-1) .................................. 14-2

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) TOC-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Operating Environment................................................................................................. 14-2


Diagnostic Source Assembly............................................................................................... 14-2
Leakage Technique Factors........................................................................................ 14-2
Quality Equivalent Filtration ........................................................................................ 14-2
Half Value Layer ( Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (m)(1),
IEC 60601-2-44 and IEC 60601-1-3)................................................................................ 14-3
CT Scan Ratings ........................................................................................................................ 14-3
Performix Ultra Tube Assembly ......................................................................................... 14-4
Classification and Compliance (Reference IEC 60601-1)............................... 14-4
Marking(Reference IEC 60601-2-28) ....................................................................... 14-4
Reference Axis for Target Angle and Focal Track............................................. 14-4
Maximum High Voltage (Reference IEC 60613) ................................................. 14-5
High Voltage Connection.............................................................................................. 14-6
Principle Dimensions (with mounting bracket)................................................... 14-6
Weight ................................................................................................................................... 14-6
X-Ray Tube Assembly Heating and Cooling Curves
(Reference IEC 60613 and 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (2) (ii)) ........................................ 14-7
Thermal Characteristics of X-Ray Tube Assembly
(Reference IEC 60613) .................................................................................................... 14-7
Performix Ultra Tube Insert.................................................................................................. 14-8
Target Material.................................................................................................................. 14-8
Maximum High Voltage (Reference IEC 60613) ................................................. 14-8
Dual Focal Spots: (Reference IEC 60336)............................................................... 14-8
Target Angle with respect to Reference Axis
(Reference IEC 60601-2-28)......................................................................................... 14-8
Rotor Speed ........................................................................................................................ 14-8
Data Required for Driving the Rotating Anode
(Reference IEC 60601-2-28)......................................................................................... 14-9
Maximum Anode Heat Capacity
(Reference IEC 60613 and 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (2) (ii)) ........................................ 14-9
Serial Exposure Rating (Reference IEC 60613).................................................... 14-9
Single Exposure Load Rating (Reference IEC 60613).................................... 14-10
Nominal Anode Input Power (Reference IEC 60613)..................................... 14-12
Maximum Filament Current (Reference IEC 60613)...................................... 14-12
Electron Emission Curves (Reference IEC 60613) ........................................... 14-12
Focal Spot Modulation Transfer Function ......................................................... 14-14
Environmental Health & Safety (EHS) Information................................................. 14-16
Hazardous Materials ................................................................................................... 14-16
Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 14-16
Performix Plus X-Ray Tube ........................................................................................................ 14-17
X-Ray Tube Model Numbers............................................................................................. 14-17
Environmental Specifications .......................................................................................... 14-17
Non-Operating Environment ................................................................................... 14-17
Operating Environment.............................................................................................. 14-17
X-ray Characteristics ........................................................................................................... 14-18

TOC-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Leakage Technique Factors..................................................................................... 14-18
Total Filtration................................................................................................................. 14-18
Permanent Filtration.................................................................................................... 14-18
Applicable Regulations and Standards....................................................................... 14-18
Applicable Regulations and Standards............................................................... 14-18
Classification ................................................................................................................... 14-19
Reference Axis for Target Angle and Focal Spots.......................................... 14-19
HV Connection................................................................................................................ 14-20
Focal Spot Location and Principal Dimensions............................................... 14-20
Pressure and Thermal Management ................................................................... 14-21
Nominal Tube Voltage ................................................................................................ 14-22
Construction .................................................................................................................... 14-22
PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly Heating and
Cooling Curves .............................................................................................................. 14-23
Thermal characteristics ............................................................................................. 14-23
Maximum Continuous Dissipation ........................................................................ 14-23
Nominal Continuous Input Power ......................................................................... 14-24
Beam Limiting Devices ............................................................................................... 14-24
Nominal CT Scan Power Index................................................................................ 14-24
Envelope Voltage........................................................................................................... 14-24
Envelope Current........................................................................................................... 14-24
PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube (Insert) .......................................................................... 14-25
Target Material............................................................................................................... 14-25
Nominal Anode Input Power.................................................................................... 14-25
Maximum Anode Heat Content.............................................................................. 14-25
Nominal CT Anode Input Power ............................................................................. 14-25
Continuous Anode Input Power ............................................................................. 14-25
Focal Spots....................................................................................................................... 14-25
Target Angle with Respect to Reference Axis .................................................. 14-26
Anode Rotation ............................................................................................................. 14-26
X-ray Tube Minimum Inherent Filtration ............................................................ 14-26
Anode Heating and Cooling Curve........................................................................ 14-26
Single Load Ratings...................................................................................................... 14-27
Serial Load Ratings....................................................................................................... 14-27
Maximum Filament Current ..................................................................................... 14-28
Cathode Emission Characteristics ........................................................................ 14-28
Environmental Health & Safety (EHS) Information................................................. 14-30
Hazardous Materials ................................................................................................... 14-30
Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 14-31
Explanation of Symbols Used in Markings ................................................................ 14-31
Routine Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 14-32
Manufacturer Address ........................................................................................................ 14-33

Chapter 15: Regulatory Information


Applicable Regulations and Standards:......................................................................... 15-1

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) TOC-7


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Intended Use ...................................................................................................................... 15-3


Indications For Use .................................................................................................................. 15-3

Chapter 16: Electromagnetic Compatibility


1.0 GENERAL SCOPE........................................................................................................ 16-2
2.0 ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSION............................................................................ 16-3
3.0 ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY........................................................................... 16-4
4.0 USE LIMITATION:........................................................................................................ 16-7
5.0 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS & ENVIRONMENT CONTROL: .............. 16-7

Chapter 17: System Specifications


Gantry Labeling (Reference 1010.3) ........................................................................ 17-2
PDU Labeling (Reference 1010.3).............................................................................. 17-4
Console Labeling (Reference 1010.3)...................................................................... 17-5
Helical High-Contrast Spatial Resolution ...................................................................... 17-8
Axial High-Contrast Spatial Resolution .......................................................................... 17-9
Helical Low-Contrast Detectability - Statistical.......................................................... 17-9
Standard Algorithm......................................................................................................... 17-9
ASiR Reconstruction..................................................................................................... 17-10
Axial Low-Contrast Detectability - Statistical........................................................... 17-10
Standard Algorithm...................................................................................................... 17-10
ASiR Reconstruction..................................................................................................... 17-11
Helical Image Noise (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c) (3) (i) and YY0310) ......... 17-11
Standard Algorithm...................................................................................................... 17-11
ASiR Reconstruction..................................................................................................... 17-12
Axial Image Noise / Uniformity / Mean CT Number
(Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c) (3) (i) and YY0310)..................................................... 17-12
Head.................................................................................................................................... 17-12
Body..................................................................................................................................... 17-13
Dose Performance ................................................................................................................ 17-13
Volumetric Helical Scan Image Quality:...................................................................... 17-17
Subsystem Specifications.................................................................................................. 17-18
Operator Console NIO16............................................................................................ 17-18
Operator Console GOC4............................................................................................. 17-19
DAS/Detector .................................................................................................................. 17-20
Table.................................................................................................................................... 17-21
Gantry................................................................................................................................. 17-21
X-Ray Tube ....................................................................................................................... 17-22
Focal Spots....................................................................................................................... 17-22
Laser Alignment Lights............................................................................................... 17-23
Main Power Supply....................................................................................................... 17-23
Generator Subsystem Specifications........................................................................... 17-24
kV, mA, and Time Accuracy .............................................................................................. 17-24

TOC-8 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Kilovolts.............................................................................................................................. 17-24
Milliamperes .................................................................................................................... 17-25
Exposure Time ................................................................................................................ 17-25
Measuring Tool Variance........................................................................................... 17-25
Accuracy Subject to Following Conditions........................................................ 17-26
Measurement Basis.............................................................................................................. 17-26
Kilovolts.............................................................................................................................. 17-26
Milliamperes .................................................................................................................... 17-27
Exposure Time ................................................................................................................ 17-27
Class 1 Equipment ........................................................................................................ 17-29
Type B Equipment........................................................................................................ 17-29
Ordinary Equipment..................................................................................................... 17-29
Operation of Equipment ............................................................................................ 17-30
Environmental Specifications .......................................................................................... 17-30
System Cooling Requirements................................................................................ 17-30
Temperature and Humidity Specifications................................................................ 17-31
Ambient Temperature................................................................................................. 17-31
Electromagnetic Interference ................................................................................. 17-32
Pollution............................................................................................................................. 17-32
Cleaning............................................................................................................................. 17-32
Carpeting .......................................................................................................................... 17-33
Lighting .............................................................................................................................. 17-33

Chapter 18: Planned Maintenance

Chapter 19: Product Manufacturer

Chapter 20: Abbreviations


Reference Noise Index 1
Dose Information Reference 1
Purchasable Options 1
Option Descriptions................................................................................................................... C-2

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) TOC-9


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

TOC-10 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Before You Start

Chapter 1
Before You Start

Anyone who operates this system should have received prior training before they attempt to
scan or diagnose patients. This training should include medical and X-Ray education, in
addition to GE applications training. This guide does not provide medical explanations, but it
does suggest potential applications for some of the software features. It describes potential
Safety problems, and how to avoid them.
Everyone who uses this equipment must read and understand all instructions, precautions
and warnings. This manual should be kept near the equipment. Procedures and safety
precautions should be viewed periodically.
This Guide addresses three safety classifications:

DANGER: The most severe label describes conditions or actions which result in a specific
hazard. You will cause severe or fatal personal injury, or substantial property
damage, if you ignore these instructions.

WARNING: This label identifies conditions or actions for which result in a specific hazard.
You may cause severe personal injury, or substantial property damage, if you
ignore these instructions.

CAUTION: This label applies to conditions or actions that have potential hazard. You can
cause minor injury or property damage if you ignore these instructions.
This Manual uses pictures, or icons, to reinforce the printed message. It uses the
corresponding international symbol or icon next to the danger, warning or caution message.
For example, the upright hand with the lightning bolt across it warns of electrical hazards.
Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 1-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Do not use the equipment if a known safety problem exists. Call your local service
provider and have the system repaired.

User Information Description


We have divided the current User Information into two parts:
• Learning and Reference Guide: The Learning and Reference Guide contains all the user
information required to operate the scanner. It has detailed information as well as
step-by-step procedures. The Learning and Reference Guide is displayed on the Display
monitor.
• Technical Reference Manual: This manual details safety information and specifications
of the system and includes power off and on procedures.
• Tips & Workarounds: The precautions listed in TWA contain information and tips that
may be useful for certain situations encountered while using the system.
• Manufacturing Matrix: It is an addendum to the Technical Reference Manual to list the
manufacturers by product that are authorized to CE mark the products listed.

Applications Help
Although we try to make this guide complete and accurate, undocumented changes or
unexpected results do occur.
If you can't find the answer to your application question, you may call the Customer Center.
Use this phone number for non emergency purposes only, because you may not receive an
immediate response.
1-800-682-5327 Select 1 for Applications Answer line.
Select 3 for CT Application assistance.
If your system fails, or you have an emergency, call
GE Cares at 1-800-437-1171.

CAUTION: This system was designed for use by individuals trained in CT system
operation. Study the Safety Tab of this Manual before you scan the first
patient. Use the Index to find the section and page number of an item of
interest. Periodically review the Learning and Reference Guide and the
Technical Reference Manual.

1-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Before You Start

CAUTION: Improper system usage could void your warranty. More importantly, you
could endanger your patients and yourself if you don't follow the correct
procedures.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 1-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Please keep User Information readily available.


Send your comments to:
General Electric Healthcare
CT Application (NB-911)
P. O. Box 414
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414
U.S.A.

1-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-ray Protection

Chapter 2
X-ray Protection

CAUTION: Improperly used X-Ray equipment may cause injury. Read and understand
the instructions in this book before you attempt to operate this equipment.
If you fail to follow safe X-Ray practices or ignore the advice presented in the
manual, you and your patient risk exposure to hazardous radiation. The
General Electric Company, Healthcare Group, will gladly assist and cooperate
in placing this equipment into use.
Although this equipment incorporates a high degree of protection against X-Ray outside the
useful beam, no practical design can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical
design compel a user to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any person
carelessly, unwisely, or unknowingly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
Everyone having anything to do with X-Ray must receive proper training and become fully
acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements, and the International Commission on Radiation Protection.
NCRP reports are available from:
NCRP Publications
7910 Woodmont Avenue
Room 1016
Bethesda, Maryland 20814

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 2-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CAUTION: Everyone having anything to do with X-Ray must take adequate steps to
insure protection against injury.
All persons authorized to use the equipment must understand the dangers posed by
excessive X-Ray exposure. We sell the equipment with the understanding that the General
Electric Company, Healthcare Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility
for injury or damage which may result from exposure to X-Ray.
GE urges you to use protective materials and devices.

2-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Chapter 3
Safety

Introduction
This chapter provides information about safety precautions and procedures. It is important
for you to read and understand the contents of this chapter so the correct precautions and
procedures are followed.
This manual should be kept near the console for easy access.

CAUTION: This system was designed for use by individuals trained in CT system
operation. Study the Safety Tab of this Manual before you scan the first
patient. Use the Index to find the section and page number of an item of
interest. Periodically review the Learning and Reference Guide, Applications
Tips and Workarounds, and the Technical Reference Manual.
If necessary, additional training is available from a GE Applications Specialist. Contact your
institution’s GE sales representative for additional information about further safety and
operational training.

WARNING: Modification of any existing patient data on the system must follow the
guidelines specified in the User Manual. (Reference 21CFR 801.109)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

The system is classified as a Class I, IPX0 equipment, not suitable for use in the presence of a
flammable anesthetic mixture with oxygen or nitrous oxide. It is rated for continuous
operation with intermittent loading. No sterilization is applied. The patient table cradle and
cradle accessories are considered Type B applied parts.
The system is intended to be used for head and whole body computed tomography. Refer to
each Technical Reference Manual for the detail information.
United States Federal Regulation 21CFR 801.109

CAUTION: Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

CAUTION: Improper system usage could void your warranty. More importantly, you
could endanger your patients and yourself if you don't follow the correct
procedures.
Watch for electromagnetic compatibility from other hardware. Detailed information can be
found in the Electromagnetic Compatibility chapter in the Technical Reference manual.

3-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

What Do I Need to Know About ...


The Learning and Reference Guide and Technical Reference Manual include information
required for the safe use of the equipment. This chapter summarizes the most important
safety issues. Some of the concepts you need to understand:
• Warning Labels and Symbols
• General Safety Guidelines
• Radiation Safety
• Electrical Safety
• Mechanical Safety
• Laser Safety (Reference 21CFR 1040.10 (h))
• Reconstructed Image Orientation
• Data Safety
• Application Software Safety
• Application Specific Safety Topics
• Accuracy of Measurements
• Operator Console Ergonomics
• Accessories
• Emergency Devices and Emergency Egress
• Maintenance and Cleaning
• Cleaning Equipment (Bio Hazard)
• Environmental Concerns
• Name and Concentration of Hazardous Substances

Warning Labels and Symbols


This chapter addresses three safety classifications:

DANGER: The most severe label describes conditions or actions which result in a specific
hazard. You will cause severe or fatal personal injury, or substantial property
damage if you ignore these instructions.

WARNING: This label identifies conditions or actions which result in a specific hazard.
You will cause severe personal injury, or substantial property damage if you
ignore these instructions.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CAUTION: This label applies to conditions or actions that have potential hazard. You may
cause minor injury or property damage if you ignore these instructions.
This chapter uses the international symbol or icon along with the danger, warning or caution
message.
Table 3-1 IEC Standards

Symbol Description

Alternating current

Protective earthing point

ON / Power

OFF / Power OFF

Input Power

Output Power

Type B Equipment

Functional Earth Ground

3-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Symbol Description (Continued)

Warning, Caution - consult accompanying documents

Electrical Shock Hazard

Table 3-2 Symbols used in Labeling

Symbol Definition

Made for Indicates the Manufacturer (responsible design owner)

by (Made
Indicates the Manufacturing Location
by)

ISO 7010 Graphic W001 General Warning Sign

Refer to instruction manual/ booklet

Pushing prohibited

Model Number

Serial Number

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Symbol Definition (Continued)

Date of Manufacture

X-Ray Filtration (Al Equivalent


Filtration)

Minimum Filtration

Radiation of Laser Apparatus

Large Focal Spot

Small Focal Spot

Figure 3-1 The following warning labels are located at the bottom of the gantry cover
(Reference 21CFR 1040.10 (h))

CAUTION: LASER RADIATION


DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

3-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Figure 3-2 Labels on the front of the gantry (Reference 21CFR 1040.10(h)):

CAUTION: LASER APERTURE


Do not stare into beam
Figure 3-3 The following warning label is located on the table

CAUTION: Finger Pinching Can Cause physical injury.


To Prevent pinching of fingers, keep fingers away from this area before operating the
switch for Elevation Down and IMS IN.

Figure 3-4 The following warning label is located on the table

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-7


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CAUTION: Finger Pinching Can Cause physical injury.


To Prevent pinching of fingers, keep fingers away from this area before
operating the switch for cradle OUT.

Figure 3-5 Label on the side of the table

CAUTION: Do not grasp the side of the cradle.


Figure 3-6 The following label is located on the operators console for systems
manufactured after June 10, 2006 (Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (j))

WARNING: This x-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe
exposure factors, operating instructions and maintenance schedules are
observed. To be used by authorized personnel only.

3-8 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Figure 3-7 The following label is located on the operators console for systems
manufactured before June 10, 2006 (Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (j))

WARNING: This x-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe
exposure factors and operating instructions are observed. To be used by
authorized personnel only.

Equipment Warning Labels


The following Warning Labels are used on the equipment per IEC60601-1:2005:
Figure 3-8 Warning label on lower left side and lower right of front and rear covers of gantry

! CAUTION
PINCH POINT.
Keep hands clear
when tilting.

CAUTION: PINCH POINT. Keep hands clear when tilting.

WARNING: Do not place your hands inside the gantry opening when tilting the gantry.
The gantry can pinch or crush your hands!

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-9


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 3-9 Warning label on gantry front cover, table, operator console, and PDU

! CAUTION
AVOID INJURY.
Read and understand
information in manuals
before operating product.

CAUTION: AVOID INJURY. Read and understand information in manuals before operating
product.
Figure 3-10 Warning label located on PDU

! CAUTION
PDU CAN MOVE AND
DAMAGE CABLES.
Do not lean on or move
when connected to power.

CAUTION: PDU CAN MOVE AND DAMAGE CABLES. Do not lean on or move when
connected to power.
Figure 3-11 Warning label on the table

! CAUTION
AVOID INJURY.
Do Not Exceed Table
>205kg Maximum Capacity
of 205 kg (450 lb).

CAUTION: AVOID INJURY. Do Not Exceed Table Maximum Capacity of 205 kg (450 lb).

3-10 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Figure 3-12 Load Limits

CAUTION: Excessive weight can break accessory and cause injury. Do not load more than
34 kg or 75 pounds.

Figure 3-13 Accessory

CAUTION: Do not hit the accessory against the gantry. Patient injury or equipment
damage could result.

Figure 3-14 IV Pole Load Limits

CAUTION: Do not load more than 4,5 kg or 10 pounds. Verify that extension collar is
securely tightened before use.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-11


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 3-15 Tray Load Limits

CAUTION: Do not load more than 9 kg or 20 pounds.


Figure 3-16 Accessory

CAUTION: Accessory may fall and cause injury if not latched to cradle. Make sure that
accessory is latched to underside of cradle.

General Safety Guidelines


• This product was designed and manufactured to ensure maximum safety of operation.
It should be operated and maintained in strict compliance with the safety precautions,
warnings and operating instructions contained herein, and in any other documentation
specific to the product.
• The system has been designed to meet all the safety requirements applicable to medical
equipment. However, anyone attempting to operate the system must be fully aware of
potential safety hazards.
• The manufacturer or vendor of the equipment makes no representation, however, that
the act of reading this manual renders the reader qualified to operate, test or calibrate
the system.
• The owner should make certain that only properly trained, fully qualified personnel are
authorized to operate the equipment. A list of authorized operators should be
maintained.
• This manual should be kept at hand, studied carefully and reviewed periodically by the
authorized operators.
• Unauthorized personnel should not be allowed access to the system.

3-12 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

• Do not leave the patient unobserved at any time.


• Become familiar with the functional hardware so that you can recognize serious
problems. Do not use the system if it appears damaged or fails. Wait for qualified
personnel to correct the problem.
• Abbreviations used in the operator manuals can be found in the Learning and Reference
Guide.
• If the product does not operate properly or if it fails to respond to the controls as
described in this manual, the operator should:
– First ensure the safety of the patient.
– Next ensure the protection of the equipment.
– Evacuate the area as quickly as possible in any potentially unsafe situation.
– Follow the safety precautions and procedures as specified in this manual.
– Immediately contact the local service office, report the incident and await further
instructions.
• The images and calculations provided by this system are intended as tools for the
competent user. They are explicitly not to be regarded as a sole incontrovertible basis for
clinical diagnosis. Users are encouraged to study the literature and reach their own
professional conclusions regarding the clinical utility of the system.
• Understand the product specifications, system accuracy, and stability limitations. These
limitations must be considered before making any decision based on quantitative
values. In case of doubt, please consult your sales representative.
• Do not block the ventilation ports of the electronic equipment. Always maintain at least
6 inches (15 cm) clearance around the ventilation ports to prevent overheating and
damage to the electronic hardware.

CAUTION: Prior to powering on the system, the room environmental operating


conditions found in the System Specification chapter must be maintained for
at least 24 hours. These conditions must be constantly maintained when the
system is energized and/or in use.

CAUTION: Do not load any non GE approved software onto the computer.

DANGER: Make sure all covers are in place before you use the equipment. The covers
protect you and your patient from moving parts or electrical shock. The
covers also protect the equipment.
NOTE: Only qualified Service personnel should service the system with the covers off.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-13


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

DANGER: Information on internal gantry components is provided for user education.


The gantry contains dangerous voltages and moving parts. TO PREVENT
ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR CRUSHING INJURIES, DO NOT REMOVE COVERS OR
ENTER THE GANTRY. ONLY TRAINED, QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONEL MAY
REMOVE GANTRY OR OTHER EQUIPMENT COVERS.

WARNING: This system is intended for use by healthcare professionals only. This system
may cause radio interference or may disrupt the operation of nearby
equipment. It may be necessary to take mitigation measures, such as
reorienting or relocating the system or shielding the location.

CAUTION: Installation of the system shall be performed by qualified persons designated


by the Manufacturer. To be certain of the proper installation of the equipment,
please contact your local GE Healthcare Service representative.
NOTE: The installation instructions can be found in the Pre-Installation and Installation
manual that is supplied and accompanies the equipment.

WARNING: No modification of this equipment is allowed without authorization of the


manufacturer.

Implantable Device Safety

WARNING: CT Scans may cause interference with implanted or externally worn electronic
medical devices such as pacemakers, defibrillators, neuro stimulators and
drug infusion pumps. The interference could cause operational changes or
malfunction of the electronic medical device.

3-14 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Recommendations prior to scanning:


 If practical try to move external devices out of the scan range.
 Ask patients with neurostimulators to shut off the device temporarily while the scan
is performed.
 Minimize the x-ray exposure to the electronic medical device.
 Use the lowest possible x-ray tube current consistent with obtaining the required
image quality.
 Do not scan directly over the electronic device for more than a few seconds.
NOTE: For procedures such as CT Perfusion or CT Interventional scans that require scanning
over the electronic medical device for more than a few seconds, attending staff
should be ready to take emergency measures to treat adverse reactions if they occur.

Recommendations after scanning


 Have the patient turn the device back on if it had been turned off prior to scanning.
 Have the patient check the device for proper functioning, even if the device was
turned off.
 Advise patients to contact their healthcare provider as soon as possible if they
suspect their device is not functioning properly after a CT scan.
NOTE: Recommendations from FDA Preliminary Public Health Notification: Possible
Malfunction of Electronic Medical Devices Caused by Computed Tomography (CT)
Scanning date July 14, 2008.

Radiation Safety
(Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (1) (i))

WARNING: Improperly used X-Ray equipment may cause injury. Read and understand
the instructions in this book before you attempt to operate this equipment.
If you fail to follow safe X-Ray practices or ignore the advice presented in the
manual, you and your patient risk exposure to hazardous radiation.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-15


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Authorized Users
This equipment incorporates a high degree of protection against X-Ray radiation outside the
useful beam. But this equipment can not substitute the essential requirement that every
user must take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any person carelessly,
unwisely, or unknowingly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
Everyone having anything to do with X-Ray equipment must receive proper training and
become fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurements and the International Commission on Radiation Protection.
NCRP reports are available from:
NCRP Publications
7910 Woodmont Avenue
Room 1016
Bethesda, Maryland 20814

WARNING: Everyone having anything to do with X-Ray equipment must take adequate
steps to insure protection against injury.
All persons authorized to use the equipment must understand the dangers posed by X-Ray
exposure so that they can prevent any injury or damage that may result from such
exposure. GE urges you to use protective materials and devices to prevent any injury or
damage from X-Ray exposure.

General Radiation Safety

WARNING: Never scan a patient with unauthorized personnel in the scan room. Warn
visitors and patients about potential for harm if they fail to follow
instructions.

WARNING: Never calibrate, test the system, or warm the tube with patients or personnel
present in the scan room without adequate radiation safety precautions
being utilized.
– Stay behind a lead screen or lead glass shield during each X-Ray exposure.
– Use technique factors prescribed by the radiologist or diagnostician. Use a dose that
produces the best diagnostic results with the least X-Ray exposure.
– Amber indicator lights on the gantry display panel, and rear of the gantry, illuminate
during X-Ray exposure.

3-16 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than


those specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Scans Acquired at the Same Tomographic Plane


IEC standard 60601-2-44 section 29.105 paragraph states that you must be warned when
scans are acquired at the same tomographic plane, i.e. same scan location. The need for the
warning is to make users aware of the potential dose that can be given to the patient when
acquiring scans at the same table location.
When acquiring scans in this mode:
– Utilize the dose information displayed on the View Edit screen. The dose information
displayed is covered in the next section, CTDIvol.
– An optional DICOM Structured Report (SR) Dose Report is saved in Series 997.
– Use proper techniques for the application and anatomy you are scanning.
A warning message (Figure 3-17) is posted when [Confirm] is selected for the following scan
types:
– SmartStep/SmartView
– SmartPrep Baseline and Monitor scans
– Cine scans
– Axial scans with zero table increment (interval)
Figure 3-17 Warning Message when scanning on the same tomographic plane: Axial, Cine
and Helical

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-17


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

WARNING: This series contains one or more groups with multiple scans at the same
tomographic plane, i.e. same location.
Do you want to continue?

CAUTION: Prolonged exposure to x-ray in one spot may cause reddening or radiation
burns. Users must be aware of the techniques used and exposure time to
insure safe operation.

Geometric Efficiency
IEC60601-1 third edition and related standards, such as IEC600601-2-44 third edition, state
that when a prescribed scanning parameter has the detector coverage with dose efficiency
of less than 70 %, a warning pop-up shall be displayed and confirmed.
A warning message is posted when the Geometric Efficiency in the Z-direction is less than
70%. Geometric Efficiency is a measure of how much of the X-ray beam in the Z-direction is
used by the system.
Figure 3-18 Warning message when dose efficiency less than 70 %.

WARNING: The Geometric Efficiency in the Z direction is less than 70% for image 1-73.
After reading the message, if you wish to continue with the scan, click [Continue].
NOTE: The image number of 1-73 is just for example.

3-18 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

CTDIvol
As you setup the scan parameters from the view/edit screen, the Dose Information area at
the upper right of the scan monitor contains updated dose information. This dose
information is based on a measurement of the CTDI or CT Dose Index, which is the current
standard for CT dosimetry and performance. By using a measurement called CTDIvol, a
single value is provided to estimate the relative dose for an exam.
The CTDIvol is a weighted average measurement in a reference phantom. This dose is
expressed in milliGrays. For additional information on specific CTDIvol doses and their
calculations, refer to your Technical Reference manual.
The DLP or Dose Length Product is the product of the CTDIvol and the scan length for a
group of scans. This number can be summed over the entire exam to give an estimate of the
total dose. The value is expressed in milliGray centimeters.
The Projected Series DLP shows the DLP that would result from scanning the current group
or groups.
The Accumulated Exam DLP displays the total exam DLP up to the current point in time.
Scout dose is not included in the DLP totals since standards for reporting scout dose are not
yet defined. Scout dose is generally a very small part of the exam.
The dose information updates when technique values such as kV, mA, scan time, slice
thickness, and scan field of view are changed.
Dose information is saved as screen save image in Series 999 upon End Exam and Series
997 contains the DICOM Dose Structured Report.

Pediatric and Small Patient Imaging


Adult techniques and protocols should not be used on pediatric patients (under 2 years of
age.) The National Cancer Institute and The Society for Pediatric Radiology developed a
brochure, http://www.cancer.gov/cancertopics/causes/radiation-risks-pediatric-CT and the
FDA issued a Public Health Notification, http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/safety/110201-ct.html,
that discuss the value of CT and the importance of minimizing the radiation dose, especially
in children. More information can also be obtained at http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/ct/.

X-Ray Tubes
The system uses cooling and reconstruction algorithms specifically designed for GE X-Ray
tubes.
You risk three dangers when you do not use GE X-Ray tubes.
• A non GE tube could cause destructive component failure if the cooling delays do not
meet its design requirements.
• The images could exhibit reduced performance or artifacts if your x-ray tube fails to
conform with GE tube performance specifications.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-19


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• Radiation leakage may exceed GE specifications when a non GE X-Ray tube is installed
in the system.

CAUTION: We cannot guarantee performance or safety if you use a non GE X-Ray tube
because the cooling and reconstruction algorithms depend upon the tube
design. Radiation leakage may exceed GE specifications when a non GE X-Ray
tube is installed in the system.

Electrical Safety

DANGER: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD. Avoid all contact with any electrical conductor.
Do not remove or open system covers or plugs. Internal circuits use high
voltage capable of causing serious injury.
To guarantee safe, reliable equipment performance, prepare the site
according to GE Medical Systems requirements. This includes making sure
the equipment is connected to a power supply main with a protective earth
ground. If you have any questions about these requirements, contact GE
Medical Systems.
An electrical hazard may exist if any light, monitor or visual indicator stays
on after the system is shut down. To prevent possible injury, turn off the
main power supply wall switch, and contact your service office immediately.

DANGER: NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS. Refer service to qualified service personnel.


Only allow people who know the proper procedures, and use of the proper
tools, to install, adjust, repair, or modify the equipment.
To guarantee safe, reliable equipment performance, prepare the site
according to GE requirements. If you have any questions about these
requirements, contact GEs.
Fuses blown within 36 hours of being replaced may indicate malfunctioning
electrical circuits within the system. Have the system checked by qualified
service personnel, and do not attempt to replace any fuse.

3-20 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

DANGER: ELECTRICAL FIRE. Conductive fluids that seep into the active circuit
components of the system may cause short circuits that can result in
electrical fires. Therefore, do not place any liquid or food on any part of the
system.
To avoid electrical shocks or burns caused by the use of wrong type of fire
extinguisher, make sure that only fire extinguishers approved for use on
electrical fires are used.

CAUTION: Gantry and console rear plug in panel Receptacles are not for general use.
• Surplus length of power cords or other cables from mobile accessory units that may be
used with some patient scanning should be stored in safe and isolated areas, such as
individually in a figure eight at the base of stationary equipment. This discourages signal
interference and protects cables from damage due to traffic.

CAUTION: Included power cord is only to be used when connecting GE approved


accessories to the gantry or operator console.

CAUTION: The outlets are not for General Use. Operator Console outlet has a rating for
2.5A at 120VAC. Gantry outlets have a rating for 2.0A at 120VAC. Accessories
should not exceed above rating.
A CT System combined with GE approved accessories complies with the IEC60601-1
standards related to safety and performance of medical electrical systems. Refer to the
standard for more information.
• Do not connect electric devices to the CT System that are not approved by GE. It may
create increased electrical leakage current and there is possibility of electric shock.
• The GE console monitors, modem, video amp, and media tower are intended to be
powered by the CT System using cables provided. Do not connect these devices to
power sources other than the CT system (for example, wall outlets or other electrical
equipment). It may create increased electrical leakage current and there is possibility of
electric shock.
• Note that some powered equipment may only be connected by a signal cable to GE
equipment (for example, a network hub). A separation device is required for equipment
that is powered by a different power source.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-21


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Mechanical Safety

General Mechanical Safety


• Check for any obstruction around the equipment before attempting to move the table
and gantry. When performing table or gantry motions, always monitor the progress of
the motion.
• Be especially careful when tilting the gantry or moving the table when the cradle
extender or head holder is in place to avoid driving these accessories into the gantry
covers.
• The (Cradle Unlatch Indicator) is illuminated in green when the cradle is
unlocked. An unlocked cradle could potentially move unexpectedly.
•The (Interference) light illuminates when the cradle has reached a travel limit or
encountered interference.
If the table reaches one of the limits while actively pressing the controls, the limit light
will turn off when the controls are released.
Clear an interference by changing the gantry tilt, moving the cradle, or adjusting the
table height.

WARNING: Do not use the table base as a foot rest. You could entrap and injure your foot
while lowering the table. Do not place your hands between the table base and
the table side panels.

WARNING: Do not place your hands inside the gantry opening when tilting the gantry.
The gantry can pinch or crush your hands!

WARNING: Be sure that the Gantry will not touch the patient during Remote Tilt
operation. Pinching or crushing may happen if the Gantry touches the patient.
• Avoid any patient contact with the gantry during tilt or cradle movement (manual or
software driven).

Short Footprint Mode


• If the system is set to Short Footprint mode, scannable range is limited accordingly. This
should be approved by the customer during pre-installation.
• Only qualified Service personnel should change the setting of the Small Footprint Mode.
• Short Foot print Mode is available for LightSpeed Series.

3-22 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

WARNING: The IN-limit position of cradle Short Footprint Mode should be set in order not
to pinch a patient’s foot between the cradle edge and the wall of the scan
room.

WARNING: To Prevent Pinching or Crushing of the Patient, Watch the Patient and
Equipment Carefully At All Times During Table Movement. If Unwanted Motion
Occurs or Motion Does Not Stop, Press the Emergency Stop Switches on the
Console or Gantry.

Patient Positioning

CAUTION: Keep the patient in view at all times.


– Never leave the patient unattended.

CAUTION: If the head is poorly positioned in the head holder and a tilt is used, images
with different CT numbers and intensities may be seen at the edges of two
rotational interfaces. Make sure the patient is properly position up in the head
holder, not positioned such that the head is at the junction of the head holder
attachment to the cradle. If a repeat scan is needed, make sure the locations
with different intensities are in the middle of the beam collimation. Do not
repeat using exactly same prescription.

DANGER: Do Not Place a Patient on the Table (except High Capacity Table) Weighing
More Than the Upper Limit Of 450 Pounds (205kg). This Could Cause the Table
to Fail and the Patient Could Fall.

Table capacity
For HP Table
 Up to 400 lb. (180kg) with ± 0.25 mm positional accuracy guaranteed.
 400 to 450 lb. (180 to 205 kg) maximum allowed with normal operation and ± 1 mm
positional accuracy.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-23


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CAUTION: When using the external laser alignment light for patient positioning
purposes, be aware that the patient's elevation may be slightly lower with the
cradle extended than with the cradle fully retracted. This is because the cradle
may bend slightly under a patient's weight. This difference should be taken
into consideration for applications where patient position information is
critical, such as Treatment Planning. To minimize these affects, after using
the external laser alignment system to position the patient, advance the
patient to the CT scan plane. Turn on the CT alignment lights to determine if
they line up with the markers on the patient. If necessary, compensate for the
bend in the cradle by elevating the table. When the CT alignment lights line
up with the markers, set the landmark for the scan using the Internal laser
alignment light.

CAUTION: When using patient positioning accessories, make sure there are no areas,
which might cause a pinch point or interfere with patient tubing or IV.

CAUTION: Check to make sure the power injector has enough IV tubing to allow free
movement of the cradle. Make sure the unit itself does not interfere with table
travel.
Ensure excess tubing length is secured to the table top. DO NOT loop
additional IV tubing in the patient's fingers.
• Check the length of all patient health lines (IV tubing, oxygen line, etc.) and make sure
they accommodate cradle travel. Position these lines so they cannot catch on anything
within the patient vicinity or between the table and gantry during cradle travel or gantry
tilt.

CAUTION: The patient positioning straps provided with the system do not support the
full weight of the patient. Patient positioning straps should be used to aid in
patient positioning and are not meant to fully restrain the patient.

CAUTION: Care should be taken to ensure the patient positioning straps, patient
clothing, or other material will not be caught during table motion.
• The scannable range is not indicated by the black mark on the table, scannable range is
indicated by the Tilt and Travel limits button on the Gantry Controls.

3-24 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Figure 3-19 Table

CAUTION: If the table is lowered with anything in the red X area as indicated above, the
table could be damaged along with the equipment or object under the table.

CAUTION: Physically assist all patients on and off the table and into position on the
cradle.

CAUTION: The foot pedals at the base of the table for loading and unloading patients
are always active. Care should be taken not to activate the foot pedals once
the patient has been positioned on the cradle and an exam started.
• Return the gantry tilt to the 0 degree upright position, latch the cradle, and adjust the
table to a comfortable height for patient loading and unloading.
• Latch the cradle before you load or unload the patient (the Cradle Unlatch indicator
illuminates when the cradle is unlatched).

WARNING: To prevent pinching or crushing of the patient's extremities, keep the patient's
hands and feet away from the edge of the moving table top/cradle and its
surrounding equipment, or between table base and side panels of the table.
(Take special care when positioning physically large patients).

WARNING: To prevent pinching or crushing of the patient watch the patient and
equipment carefully at all times during gantry tilt or table movement. If
unwanted motion occurs or motion does not stop, press the emergency stop
switches on the console or gantry.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-25


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

WARNING: The head holder may crack, possibly injuring the patient's head or neck, if the
patient tries to brace himself or herself on the head holder during positioning.
The head holder and cradle extender are only designed to support 75 pounds
(34kg). Ask the patient to move up into the head holder or manually help the
patient into position.

CAUTION: The patient head holder or table extender should be adequately secured to
ensure stability. If they not secured properly, degradation of image quality
may result due to introduced motion of the head holder or table extender.

CAUTION: Use of any cradle extension accessories such as the table extension, head
holder, coronal head holder, and phantom holder are not accounted for in the
table gantry interference matrix. Therefore, additional care needs to be taken
to closely monitor any table up/down, in/out or gantry tilt movement to avoid
contact of the extended accessory with the gantry.
NOTE: Collision sensors are placed under the table surfaces to stop downward motion and
minimize the effects of a collision in most cases. Upward motion is still allowed if a
collision sensor has been activated.
• Check the accessory attachment plate fixed to the end of the cradle. Repair or replace if
loose or damaged.
• Use the cradle extender to support the patient's head or feet during a scan.
• To move the patient out of the gantry in an emergency, the cradle can be manually
withdrawn by applying a minimum of 40 lbs (178 N) of force.

CAUTION: Temporal sampling may be degraded due to changes in timing for the table
to move from location to location if proper positioning methods are not
followed. Make sure that the patient is securely positioned on the table and
their arms are not allowed to drag on the table or allow clothing, sheets or
blankets to get caught causing a table move problem.

WARNING: Temporal interval for some of the images exceeds 3.2 seconds. Use of this
data for processing of CT Perfusion maps may contain errors in the functional
information.

3-26 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Laser Safety (Reference 21CFR 1040.10 (h))


A laser alignment light system is available in order to accurately define the patient scan
region.

WARNING: THE LASER BEAM CAN CAUSE EYE INJURY.


- Tell all patients to close their eyes before you switch ON the alignment
lights.
- Instruct your patients to keep their eyes closed until you turn OFF the
alignment lights.
NOTE: Closely monitor infants and infirm patients, and prevent them from accidentally
staring into the beam.

CAUTION: The detector and DAS rotate to position the alignment lights over the laser
ports.
- Keep your hands away from the gantry opening.
- Make sure the gantry side covers are in place.

CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than


those specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
• The indicator on the gantry display panel lights when you turn ON the alignment lights.
• Warning labels regarding laser safety are provided on the gantry, as described in the
Warning Labels and Symbols section.

Reconstructed Image Orientation

CAUTION: If you plan to reconstruct images, you must first use the files that reside on
the disk. Either reserve the scan files you plan to retrospectively reconstruct,
or reconstruct unsaved scan files before the system overwrites the file with
new scan data. The system refuses to overwrite reserved scan files.
Remember to release the reserved scan files when you finish retrospective
reconstructions.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-27


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CAUTION: GE CT image reconstruction is in an orientation viewing from the patient's


feet. The reconstructed orientation is the orientation the image is installed in
the image data base and is the orientation images are networked with to a
remote viewing station.
Figure 3-20 Patient Orientation
A P

R L L R

P A
Head First Supine Head First Prone
A P

R L L R

P A
Feet First Supine Feet First Prone

The patient position information stored in the image header correctly reflects the orientation
(RAS) information for the patient. Viewing applications will correctly reflect Right (R), Left (L),
Anterior (A) and Posterior (P) of the patient.
The reconstructed image orientation may differ from preferred anatomical viewing
presentation in which the patient's Right is on the viewers Left and patient's Left is on the
viewers Right. For example when the patient is scanned Head First and Prone the patients’s
Left is on the viewer’s Left and the patient’s Right is on the viewer’s Right. The image
presentation will need to be modified to display preferred anatomical viewing. Some
viewing stations may not have the capability to flip the image presentation, but if the
capability exists, you must use display tools such as Flip to change the presentation of the
image.
Some remote viewing stations may have the capability to set default viewing protocols, this
is another tool that can be used to set an anatomical viewing presentation.
Post processing applications such as Direct MPR, Reformat and Volume Viewer
automatically orient images in anatomical viewing orientation. These applications create
axial images in anatomical viewing presentation. Please see Auto Applications (Option) of

3-28 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

the Learning and Reference Guide for more information. The system also provides the
capability to create Gray Scale Presentation State Objects (GSPS) to flip the image
orientation.
Flip/Rotate in recon can be used to generate images where right/left or anterior/posterior
are flipped or where both R/L and A/P have been flipped to meet desired image display
preference. An Attention pop-up is displayed at Confirm for series where Flip/Rotate in recon
is selected. Attention: This scan prescription utilizes one of the reconstruction based image
flip and/or rotate options. Please ensure that this prescribed image orientation is displayed
appropriately on all remote viewing devices.
Figure 3-21 Flip Warning Message

CAUTION: The scan prescription utilizes one of the reconstruction based image flip
and/or rotate options. Please ensure the prescribed image orientation is
displayed correctly on all remote viewing devices.

Data Safety
To ensure data safety:
– Verify and record the patient's identification before starting a scan.
– Observe and record the patient's orientation, position and anatomical landmarks
before starting a scan. Ensure that the patient is positioned within the scan
parameters.
– Maintain system image quality by performing Daily QA and other maintenance.
Connectivity - Always verify that the data transferred to another system has been correctly
received.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-29


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CAUTION: Incorrect data entries or procedures could result in misinterpretation or


misdiagnosis.

CAUTION: When entering Patient ID information the system may contain multiple
instances of the same Patient ID. Multiple schedule records can be due to
multiple procedures being ordered under separate accession numbers or
New and Completed records in the Patient schedule for the same Patient ID.
When entering the Patient ID verify that the correct Accession number and
Exam Description selected is what is desired. Scanning with an incorrect
accession number may cause problems reconciling exams on a PACS
system. Please see the Schedule Patients chapter for more information.

CAUTION: The system posts a warning message when expected disk space required to
store scan data from the prescribed exam is insufficient.

CAUTION: The system posts a warning message when expected image space required
to store images from prescribed reconstruction is insufficient.

CAUTION: The system posts a warning message when data was interpolated to generate
images.

CAUTION: The system posts a warning message if there is a failure during the archive
of patient data.

CAUTION: The system posts a warning message if there is a failure during the network
of patient image data.

CAUTION: The system posts a warning message when a scan is aborted due to a failure
in the acquisition chain.

3-30 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

CAUTION: The system posts a warning message when the system has low disk space.
This is due to a partition on the system disk getting too full. Removing images
will not help. Contact service to help with recovery. If you reboot the system
and see the message asking if you want to run storelog, select the option to
remove the logs.

CAUTION: The system posts a warning message if patient orientation has been changed
or does not match after start of exam.

CAUTION: The system posts warning message prior to modifying any existing data set
by a software utility.

CAUTION: Do not remove images while scanning. Always remove images when the
system is idle. Removing images while the system is acquiring and
reconstructing data could cause the system to lock up and require a reboot
and/or force the system to go into data base recovery.

CAUTION: Saving images in Interchange (CD/DVD) while scanning may cause long
interscan delays (ISD) to be missed or may cause Auto Voice to fail to play. Do
not copy or restore images using CD-R or DVD-R while scanning.

CAUTION: When comparing GE CT images with other images, consult the DICOM
Conformance Statement for the details on the DICOM Image Position, Frame
of Reference UID and Slice location values stored.

CAUTION: Some annotation values are stored in private DICOM elements. When viewing
images on a remote station these annotation values may not be visible on the
image. Consult the DICOM conformance statement for information on private
DICOM data fields.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-31


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CAUTION: If you plan to reconstruct images, you must use files that reside on the disk.
Either reserve the scan files you plan to retrospectively reconstruct, or
reconstruct unsaved scan files before the system overwrites the files with
new scan data. The system refuses to overwrite reserved scan files.
Remember to release the reserved scan files when you finish retrospective
reconstruction.

Application Software Safety

CAUTION: Do not initiate a QuickSnap if the system is actively collecting data with x-ray
on.

CAUTION: Do not initiate an IQ Snap while the system is actively scanning or


reconstructing data.

Application Specific Safety Topics

Helical Scanning

WARNING: Helical scanning has the inherent ability to produce artifacts when scanning
highly sloped anatomy (e.g. pediatric or adult heads). Factors which worsen
this effect are: faster table speeds, thicker image thickness, and gantry tilt.
In some cases these artifacts could be mistaken for a hemorrhage near the
cranium, or a thickening of the skull.
To reduce the occurrence of these artifacts you may prescribe slower table
speeds and/or thinner slices (such as 2.5mm) during helical scans near the
vertex of a pediatric or adult head.

3-32 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

WARNING: It has been documented in radiology literature that an artifact may occur in
the chest that bears the double margin of the great vessels, which emulates
a dissection of the vessel during 0.5 - 1.0 second scans. This can occur in axial
or helical scans. If you have scanned axially with a 0.5 - 1.0 second rotation
time and observe this phenomenon, re-scan the area with a 2 second axial
scan to verify if it is artifact or patient pathology. Segment recon mode for
helical and cine acquisitions may be used in Retro recon to also assess if the
areas is artifact or pathology.

Cardiac Imaging

CAUTION: A patient with any of the conditions listed below may require additional
attention. If patients are scanned with these conditions, the software may not
be able to detect the R-Peaks and the images therefore may be produced as
ungated segment images.
- Patients with multiple pre-contractions or extra systole (e.g. PVC, PAC)
- Patients with persistent or extreme arrhythmia
- Patients with bi-ventricular lead (dual chamber) pacemakers

CAUTION: ECG signal clarity and integrity must be confirmed prior to performing
ECG-gated acquisitions. Items which may require adjustment of equipment
settings or positioning, or patient set-up include:
- External Interference
- Atypical Patient ECG (e.g. elevated T-Waves, low ECG amplitude or signal
strength)
- Suboptimal Patient Connection
ECG lead placement should follow recommended guidelines to optimize
results.
If the ECG lead is disconnected during the scan, or the heart rate drops
below 40 BPM, the images will be reconstructed as non-gated segment
images. This is done to avoid inaccuracy of the z-location of images where
necessary.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-33


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CAUTION: The heart rate displayed on CT console is a 3-cycle average. You must review
the actual waveform pattern to determine ECG trace clarity, trigger location
and if any cycle to cycle variability or masked arrhythmias may be present in
order to adapt set up and conditions prior to proceeding with the scan
acquisition.

CAUTION: Cardiac helical scan modes of SnapShot Segment, Burst, and Burst Plus are
optimized for specific heart rate ranges. Select the appropriate scan mode
for each patient's heart rate pattern. If the incorrect mode is selected,
temporal resolution may be insufficient and degraded image quality could
result.

CAUTION: Patient motion, respiration, beat-to-beat variability of heart rate, heart


motion, or significant change in heart rate over the scan duration could cause
an ECG gated acquisition to have degraded image quality. It is important to
explain to the patient the pattern of breathing instructions to expect, the
warm feeling that can be felt from the contrast injection and to position the
patient comfortably such that the arms will not move with respect to the body
during the scan.
Heart rate information and phase location will be updated to indicate any
movement of trigger locations since heart rate and phase values are
calculated based on time between consecutive triggers and are not
diagnostic values.

Patient Preparation

CAUTION: Ensure the ECG patches are not past expiration date and that the gel on the
pads is still moist for proper conduction of the ECG signal for successful
gating.
Practice hyperventilation breathing instructions with the patient.
• It is important to explain to the patient the events that will occur during the acquisition
of the contrast enhanced cardiac data. Make sure to explain the warm feeling that may
occur during the injection of the contrast material.
• Use hyperventilation technique for all the series in a cardiac exam. Practice the
hyperventilation instructions with the patient prior to scanning.

3-34 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

• During the practice breath hold, make sure to watch the ECG trigger monitor to
determine the average heart rate, minimum heart rate, and ECG pattern during the
breath hold.
• Position the patient's arm over the patient's head so they are comfortable and will not
move during the acquisition of data.

CAUTION: If, during the scan, the heart rate drops significantly lower than the prescribed
heart rate, there is a potential for gaps in the gated image location. To avoid
image location gaps, a non-gated image is reconstructed for the period where
the patient heart rate dropped below the expected or confirmed heart rate
at the start of the exam. A non-gated image may have more motion and may
not be reconstructed at the prescribed phase.

CAUTION: There is a possibility that the ECG signal may not be detected by the scanner
due to improper lead placements, or a lead falling off during the scan. It is
important to place new leads on the patient before the scan. Make sure the
leads are attached properly, and use only GE recommended ECG leads.
It is important to confirm ECG trace clarity before the scan.

CAUTION: The heart rate displayed on the CT console is a 3-cycle average. You must
review the actual waveform pattern to determine ECG trace clarity, trigger
locations, and if any cycle to cycle variability or masked arrhythmias may be
present in order to adapt set up and conditions prior to proceeding with the
scan acquisition.

Lung Algorithm
• The Lung algorithm setting provides edge enhancement between structures with large
density differences, such as calcium and air, resulting in a sharper lung field when
compared to Standard algorithm.
• For best image quality, prescribe a 5 mm scan thickness when you plan to use the Lung
algorithm. If you plan to prescribe a High Resolution Lung study with 3.75, 2.5, or
1.25 mm, use the Bone algorithm.
• The Lung setting enhances the contrast of small objects. For best viewing and film
quality, select a window width of 1000 to 1500 and a window level of -500 to -600.
• The Lung algorithm setting increases the CT number values at the edge of high contrast
objects. If you plan to take CT number measurements of vessels or nodules in the lung,
please check and compare your results with Standard algorithm images. (ROI and
Histogram functions use CT numbers.)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-35


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• Remember: The edge enhancement provided by the Lung setting may not be
appropriate in some clinical cases. Please take individual viewing preferences into
account when you choose the Lung setting.

Autoscan
• Press and release Move to Scan on the console to advance the cradle.
• If Autoscan is disabled, Move to Scan must be pressed for every scan before Start Scan
will become ready.
• If you select Auto Scan during one group Rx, it remains ON for every group in that series.

SmartStep/SmartView Safety
The SmartStep option adds several components to the scan room. These are the In-Room
Monitor, Hand Held Control for table movement as well as image review, and the X-Ray
Control Foot pedal.
Each of the SmartStep components is connected to the system by a cable. When using the
system, ensure that the cables cannot catch on anything when the gantry or table is moved.

Table Float
During the scan the Clinician has the option to float the table between scans. When the
Table Float mode is selected, the table is unlatched and can be moved freely by anyone at
the bedside.

WARNING: Unintended table motion may cause a serious injury. Table may be bumped
or jarred during an interventional procedure. Care must be taken when
performing interventional procedures in the float mode. It is the clinician's
responsibility to ensure that they have control of the table when in this mode
of operation. Table must not be left unattended when in the float mode.
Ensure that the table is latched before leaving the table side.

SmartStep/SmartView Scanning
SmartStep scanning allows multiple scans at one location for interventional procedures. The
system allows up to 90 seconds of scanning in one place. After 90 seconds, the operator
must prescribe a new scan to continue. The accumulated scan time from a procedure is
displayed in the In-Room Monitor.

CAUTION: Expose time to the patient can be up to 90 seconds per confirm compared to
60 or 120 (option) seconds for all other scan modes.

3-36 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

CAUTION: Prolonged exposure to x-ray in one spot may cause reddening or radiation
burns. User must be aware of the techniques used and exposure time to insure
safe operation.

CAUTION: The foot pedal is active if the system is in the “Prepped” state. Care should be
taken not to step on the foot pedal and make an unwanted exposure.

CAUTION: The cabling provided for the integrated Hand-Held Controller (HHC) and Foot
Pedal with the SmartView and SmartStep options may present a trip hazard.
Ensure that the cabling can not catch on anything when the gantry or table
is moved and that the cables are out of the way while loading and unloading
the patient.
Clinician's working in the scan room should wear appropriate protective clothing. Lead
aprons, groin and thyroid protection, as well as protective eye wear are available through
the GE Accessories Catalog.

Interventional / Biopsy Scanning

CAUTION: The continuous AutoView layout format should not be used for display of
images during an interventional study because it does not allow for quick
review of images in a free viewport.

WARNING: When scanning for interventional (biopsy) studies the scan mode, image
thickness, number of images per rotation and the display layout used affect
the display of the images. It is recommended to use the Biopsy Mode provided
on the system. If manually prescribing biopsy scans, Axial 1i scan mode or
Helical scan mode with a slice thickness greater than 2.5 mm must be used.
Do not use Cine scan mode for interventional (Biopsy) imaging. Do not use an
Auto view layout with more than one Auto View image viewport.
Refer to "Select a Multiple Image Display” in the Image Display Viewing Area chapter
of the Learning and Reference Guide for more information on how to set up the
desired viewing options.
Choose one of the following for the best auto view layouts.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-37


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 3-22 Auto View Layouts

Advanced Applications Safety

CAUTION: 3D or slab Reconstructions provide additional supplemental information,


complementing diagnosis that should be based on classical techniques.

WARNING: Non GE images acquired can be loaded in Volume Viewer but GE does not
guarantee the quality or reliability of any reconstruction, segmentation or
measurements performed on these images. Non-GE images can easily be
identified by the corresponding image annotation.
Follow the DICOM acquisition parameter guidelines listed in each
application user guide. Consult GE-published DICOM conformance
statement of Volume Viewer which is available on the GE Healthcare website
at
http://www.gehealthcare.com/usen/interoperability/dicom/products/workstati
on_dicom.html

WARNING: Before using any segmentation tool (threshold, scalpel, remove & keep object,
AutoSelect, “floater” filters…) always make sure that it will not remove
pathologies or other essential anatomical structures.

3-38 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

WARNING: When using any Segmentation tools (AutoSelect, threshold, Paint on slice,
Quick Paint…), check contours to check the reliability of the segmentation.
Make sure the contours match the correct segmentation and volumes Check
segmented volumes match contours.

Measurements

WARNING: Do not use 3D or slab views only to perform any measurements (distance,
angle, Region of Interest, Report Cursor, Area, Volume…). Always check
measurement points position and refer to 2D baseline views (acquisition
images or reformatted images of minimal thickness) to confirm
measurements.

CAUTION: The software calculates and displays measurements with a resolution of one
decimal (such as 0.1 mm, 0.1 degree, etc.). You should be aware that the real
measurement accuracy is generally less for a number of different reasons
(image resolution, acquisition conditions…).
Distance, angle and area measurements are valid only if all trace segments
are longer than the inter- slice distance.

WARNING: Depending on WW/WL settings, objects may display differently. Check


WL/WW before depositing measurement points.

CAUTION: When filming or saving images for diagnostic purposes, always make sure
the patient name and geometry information is displayed on all views and
match information on reference view.

CAUTION: When saving images with a new series description, make sure this description
matches the saved images.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-39


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

WARNING: Check with original datasets the reliability of segmentations and


measurements performed in Saved objects after post processing and
reloading.

Segment Tools

WARNING: Before using any segmentation tool (threshold, scalpel, remove & keep object,
AutoSelect, “floater” filters…) always make sure that it will not remove
pathologies or other essential anatomical structures.

WARNING: When using any Segmentation tools (AutoSelect, threshold, Paint on slice,
Quick Paint…), check contours to check the reliability of the segmentation.
Make sure the contours match the correct segmentation and volumes Check
segmented volumes match contours.

Filming and Saving Images

CAUTION: When filming or saving images for diagnostic purposes, always make sure
the patient name and geometry information is displayed on all views and
match information on reference view.

CAUTION: When saving images with a new series description, make sure this description
matches the saved images.

CAUTION: Check with original datasets the reliability of segmentations and


measurements performed in Saved objects after post processing and
reloading

3-40 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Image reliability

CAUTION: 3D or slab Reconstructions provide additional supplemental information,


complementing diagnosis that should be based on classical techniques

WARNING: Always correlate any information (cursor position, image orientation,


measurements, image quality…) in any 3D reconstruction (reformatted plane,
oblique, MPVR, MIP, Volume Rendering, Navigator endoluminal views, Curved,
segmentations, measurements, tracking, saved images…) with the original
data (acquisition or baseline images).

WARNING: A 3D view is a two-dimensional projection on the screen of the 3D Volume.


There is no indication on a 3D view of how “deep “inside the 3D volume a 3D
cursor is. Always check the accuracy and consistency of 3D coordinates by
checking cursor position on original data (acquisition images)

Window Width and Level (W/L)

WARNING: The window width and level (W/L) determine how clearly pathologies and
other anatomical structures can be discerned. Incorrect W/L settings may
result in pathologies and other essential anatomical structures not being
displayed correctly. As a single W/L cannot display all features present in an
exam, use several different setting, when necessary to explore all exam data

Volume Rendering

WARNING: When using Volume Rendering, incorrect setting of opacity curve, opacity
threshold, transparency setting when merging VR objects can result in
pathology or essential anatomies not being visible. Always correlate Volume
Rendering images with original images.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-41


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Image quality

WARNING: At all times, it remains the responsibility of the physician to determine


whether the inter- slice distance used for a particular exam is acceptable.

WARNING: Loading non-square pixels will results in bad quality image.

WARNING: Default Plaque Color Map preset is provided for information. You must check
and adjust Values and segment names.

Accuracy of Measurements

Measure Distance for Axial, Helical, and Cine Images

CAUTION: This section includes information on accuracy of measurements used when


reviewing images.
Measure error using the straight line distance graphic is less than two times the image pixel
size.

CAUTION: Note that the measurements are accurate only if the trace segments are
longer than the slice interval.

Measure Distance for Scout Images


Accuracy of measurements for scout images in the “X” direction varies with object thickness
and distance from ISO center in the “Y” direction. Note the orientations of the “X” and “Y” in
Figure 3-23 below assume a scout scan plane of 0 degrees. If the scout plane is rotated then
the “X” and “Y” orientation changes accordingly.
• For measurements of anatomy in the “X” direction that are at ISO center (“Y”):
– The measure error using the straight line distance graphic is less than 5 % of the
measured distance plus 2 mm.

3-42 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

• For measurements of anatomy in the “X” direction that are NOT at ISO (“Y”):
– The measure error using the straight line distance graphic is less than 5 % of the
measured distance plus 2 mm plus 3 % of measured distance per centimeter from
ISO.
• For measurements of anatomy in the “Z” direction:
– Measure error using the straight line distance graphic is less than two times the
image pixel size.
Figure 3-23 Scout Scan Plane
X-Ray Tube
Focal Spot

Y-Axis

X-Axis Scan
ISO Center Plane

Z-Axis

Patient
Table

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-43


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Measure Angle
Measurement accuracy using the angle graphic is equal to the displayed angle value +/- 10
degrees for an angle measured between segments which are five times larger than the
image pixel size. Accuracy improves as the length of the segments increases.

ROI
Area measurement accuracy using a region of interest graphic (rectangle, smooth curve,
ellipse or free draw) is equal to the displayed area +/- the circumference of the region
multiplied by (image pixel size)2/2. Mean and standard deviation values for the intensity of
the pixels in the region are also affected by this accuracy. If the ROI is rotated, the area
measurement can vary up to 5%. Region of interest statistics are based on the pixels INSIDE
the graphic defining the region.

Reformat Plane Thickness


Reformat plane thickness equals 1 pixel.
• If each axial pixel represents 0.5mm of anatomy, then the reformat plane thickness
equals 0.5mm.
• If pixel size equals 0.9766mm (500mm/512), then the reformat plane represents a slice
of anatomy about one millimeter thick.

CAUTION: CT Numbers are NOT absolute; misdiagnosis is possible. System and patient
variables may effect CT Number accuracy. If you rely solely upon CT numbers
without taking the following variables into consideration you could
misdiagnosis an image.

CAUTION: The limiting measurement resolution of the cursor is 1mm, i.e., the distance
less than 1mm but greater than 0.5mm is rounded to 1mm, therefore, the
accuracy of this testing is limited by the cursor measurement capability. This
is especially important for thin slice measurement where the FWHM is close
to 0.625mm. The results for these thin slice images will be not as accurate as
the thick slice ones. This is the limitation by this testing method.

Operator Console Ergonomics


To optimally use the system and reduce the chance of physical strain and fatigue, the
following steps are recommended regarding how you use your operator console.

3-44 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Posture
Correct posture is very important. To ensure correct posture while sitting at your operator
console, follow these basic steps:
1. Face the monitors and keyboard without twisting your body.
2. Sit comfortably erect with the small of your back well supported.
3. Position your forearms parallel to the floor, with your wrists straight.
4. Position the screen so that your eyes are nearly level with the top of the screen.
5. Keep both feet flat on the footrest, with your thighs parallel to the floor.
If you cannot comfortably maintain this position while working at your operator console, you
should make the necessary adjustments to your operator console environment.

Equipment Adjustments
Chair
Adjusting the fit and height of your chair is very important for comfort. Follow these basic
guidelines:
1. Fit the backrest snugly against your back. People with shorter legs might need a back
cushion.
2. Set your chair height to position your forearms parallel with the floor when your hands
are placed on the keyboard. If your feet dangle, you need a footrest.

Keyboard
Keyboard height is also important. When typing:
– Your wrists should be as straight as possible.
– Your forearms should be parallel to the floor.
– Your hands and fingers should float over the keys or mouse.

Screen
• The recommended viewing distance from the screen is 18 - 28 inches (45 - 70
centimeters).
• With your head straight, your eyes should be looking directly at the top of the screen.
• You should look at the screen straight-on, not at an angle from the side, top or bottom.
• Glare from the screen can disrupt your viewing and cause eyestrain. Do not face a
window, and position the screen at right angles to bright light sources.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-45


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Comfort
Comfort at your operator console indicates you've set up your work area correctly. However
even a well-designed area needs frequent adjustment, especially for different users. Take
the time when positioning yourself at your operator console to ensure your comfort.
It is also recommended that if you use the operator console for extended periods of use
(several hours at a time), that you take short breaks to get away from your operator console
and perform simple stretching exercises to reduce the chance of fatigue.
Other considerations:
– Stay alert to your patient's condition.
– Use the speakers and microphones on the table, gantry, and console to stay in
constant communication, even while you sit at the console.
– Follow the exam procedures explained in the Chapters 13 and 14 of the Learning and
Reference Manual. Carefully enter patient information and position before
proceeding.

Accessories

WARNING: Do not connect accessories that are not approved as part of the system. Do
not use accessories from other modalities.

WARNING: None of the accessories support the full weight of a patient. If you sit, stand,
or otherwise apply excessive pressure to these devices, they break or come
off the cradle and may cause injury. Note if an accessory breaks, use caution
when picking it up and do not continue to use.

CAUTION: When using patient positioning accessories that are not GE options, make
sure there are no areas that might cause a pinch point or interfere with
patient tubing or IV.

WARNING: Accessories like arm boards and catheter bag holders are not secured to
gantry and may interfere with gantry if not positioned properly.

3-46 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

WARNING: All non medical equipment connected to the USB port of the media tower on
the CT operator console must comply with IEC/EN/UL60950-1 and should be
approved by GE.

CAUTION: Do not use the USB or Ethernet port on the front cover of the CT operator
console, it is intended for service use only.

CAUTION: Using accessories which are not GE approved accessories might affect dose
and image quality.

GE Approved Accessories
Use only GE approved equipment together with this system.
With each use check all accessories for damage and remove them from service if damaged
or cracked.
Table 3-3 Types and Model

Type Manufacturer/Model
IVY 3100 with ethernet
IVY 3100 - A with ethernet
IVY 3100 - B with ethernet
Cardiac Monitor IVY 3150
IVY 3150 - A
IVY 3150 - B
IVY 7800
Varian 1.6
Respiratory Monitor
Varian 1.7
Partial UPS *1 9155-10GE
Honeywell 3800g
Bar Code Reader *1 Hand Held 3800
Opticon 6125

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-47


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Type (Continued) Manufacturer/Model (Continued)


SmartStep Monitor (includes LCD monitor,
GEHC 5115174-2
video splitter and mountings) *1
SmartStep Handheld Control *1 GEHC 2199947
SmartStep Foot pedal *1 GEHC 2199945-2
Nemoto Dual Shot Alpha (CIA425 Class I) /
GEHC 5328194
Nemoto Dual Shot Alpha (CIA425 Class IV) /
Patient contrast injector:
GEHC 5328195
For Xtream Injector option
Nemoto Dual Shot GX (CIA425 Class IV)
Medrad ISI900 (for Stellant D) (CiA425 Class
1 and Class IV) / GE 5335919
Nemoto Dual Shot Alpha (CIA425 Class IV) /
GEHC 5328195
Patient contrast injector:
Nemoto Dual Shot GX (CIA425 Class IV)
For Enhanced Xtream Injector option
Medrad ISI900 (for Stellant D) (CiA425 Class
1 and Class IV) / GE 5335919

NOTE: *1 is CT system component.


The following approved accessories were shipped with the system component:
• Patient comfort and workflow accessories such as the cradle pad, cradle extender,
patient arm board, catheter bag holder, table tray and IV pole attached to the cradle.
• Patient positioning accessories including Axial and Coronal head holders, positioning
straps and pads.
• System quality assurance accessories including imaging phantoms and phantom
holder.
Additional accessories and supplies approved for use with the system are available at
www.GEhealthcare.com.
With each use check all accessories for damage and remove them from service if damaged
or cracked.

IV Pole Safety
Care should be taken in the amount of weight and ensuring that the pole is tightened prior
to use.

CAUTION: The IV pole may bend when excessive weight is placed on the pole. Ensure no
more than 4.5 kg or 10 lb. is placed on the IV pole.

3-48 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

CAUTION: Ensure that the IV pole extension collar is tightened prior to use to avoid the
pole height to move on it's own.
Figure 3-24 IV Pole Load Limits

CAUTION: Do not load more than 4,5 kg or 10 pounds. Verify that extension collar is
securely tightened before use.

Table Tray Safety


Care should be taken in the amount of weight and the objects that are placed on the tray.
Figure 3-25 Tray Load Limits

CAUTION: Do not load more than 9 kg or 20 pounds.

CAUTION: The maximum allowable weight on the table tray is 9kg or 20 lbs

CAUTION: Objects that may be susceptible to tipping should be strapped down with the
Velcro strap provided.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-49


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Systems With Metal-Free Cradles and Accessories

CAUTION: Prevent damage to metal-free accessories! Carefully examine the metal-free


clasp assembly on the accessory and the catch on the cradle before
attempting to attach the accessory for the first time.
• To Latch an accessory:
– Align the accessory tongue with the pocket at the end of the cradle.
– Keep fingers clear of the cradle.
– Push the tongue all the way into the pocket until it latches into place.
– Rubber shims may have been installed on the head holder or foot extender to give it
a tighter fit. Please take care when latching the accessory to make sure that it is
completely latched. Push the latch forward until you hear a click. Verify that the latch
is fully latched.
• To Unlatch an accessory:
– Pinch the two L-shaped parts together and pull the accessory out of the cradle.
– An alternate method is to apply a light force to the catch in the direction to pull the
accessory out of the cradle.
• Proper operation:
– Keep the accessory “tongue” and cradle pocket clean and free of fluids and debris.
– Keep the latch and cradle pocket area clear of sheets, drapes, pads or any item that
could interfere with proper latching and cause damage.
• Positioning
– Positioning patient anatomy over the area where the head holder or cradle extension
attaches to the cradle may produce images where the contrast be between 2
adjacent rotations is different. Make sure the area of interest especially the head in
properly positioned in the head holder or on the cradle extension.

Xtream/Enhanced Xtream Injector Safety

CAUTION: The injector and the system are operated independently after the Start Scan
button is pressed. When you want to stop both the system and the injector,
use the Stop Scan button on the system SCIM and the stop injector function
on the injector.

3-50 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

CAUTION: When you use Xtream Injector with SmartPrep, injection doesn't start at the
beginning of Baseline phase. It starts at Monitor phase. Going to Scan Phase
without Monitor phase, injection will not start.

Limited Access Room Configuration

CAUTION: Due to access limitations on the left side of the gantry, some procedures may
be affected when ancillary equipment is used. Assess the placement of the
equipment needed for the procedure before the placement of the patient on
the table. Access around the left side of the gantry may also be affected.

Emergency Devices and Emergency Egress


(Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (f) (2) (ii))

Emergency Devices
The system has two types of Emergency buttons:
1. Emergency Stop- when pressed, all table and gantry motions are halted, generation of
X-rays is stopped, laser alignment lights are turned off. The system aborts any data
acquisition in progress, and attempts to save all data acquired prior to the abort. Use
the Emergency Stop button for patient related emergencies.
2. System Emergency Off Button- when pressed, the power to all system components is
removed, stopping all table and gantry motion and generation of X-rays. The system
aborts any acquisitions in progress, and data obtained prior to the abort can become
corrupt or lost. Use the System Emergency OFF button for catastrophic emergencies,
such as fire or earthquake.

CAUTION: If you press the Emergency Stop or Emergency OFF buttons during a scan, the
system will abort the data acquisition.

Emergency Stop
NOTE: Every operator should take a few minutes to locate the Emergency Stops on his or
her system before he or she scans the first patient.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-51


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

The system has five Emergency Stop buttons:


– One on each control panel on the front of the gantry (Figure 3-26).
Figure 3-26 Front of gantry Emergency Stop Buttons

– Two on the rear cover of the gantry.


– One on the Acquisition Control (Figure 3-27).
Figure 3-27 Emergency Stop button on the Keyboard

3-52 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

GOC4 console

NIO16 console

NIO16 console

Press an Emergency Stop button in the event of a patient related emergency or if the cradle,
table or gantry starts to move unexpectedly.
• Once an Emergency Stop button is pressed, the Reset gantry key, on the gantry control
panel, flashes about once every two seconds.
• Press the Reset gantry key to restore power to the gantry and table.
When Emergency Stop is applied, the moving cradle and tilting gantry may overrun by less
than 10 mm and less than 0.5 degrees respectively.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-53


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Emergency Stop Button Symbols


Emergency Stop buttons may be accompanied by one of the symbols below.

System Emergency OFF Buttons using Main Disconnect Control


(If there is MDC function)
In the event of a fire, flood, earthquake, or any other catastrophic emergency, all power to
the system should be turned off. Pressing the System Emergency OFF button immediately
removes all power to the system by removing power to the Main Disconnect Control (MDC).
Because the system has no time to save data, or shutdown in an orderly fashion, pressing
the System Emergency OFF button can corrupt system files or result in loss of patient data.
The facility designer determines the quantity and locations of the Emergency OFF buttons.
GE recommends placing an Emergency OFF button near the doorway of every room in the
system scan suite. Ask your supervisor to show you the location of all the Emergency OFF
buttons in the system suite. Follow facility guidelines to report an emergency.
Press the System Emergency OFF button (red, circular button located on the wall) in the
event of a catastrophic emergency, such as fire or earthquake.

Reset the Emergency OFF Button


1. Press the Start button on the Main Disconnect Control.
 Power to the Power Distribution Unit (PDU), operator console and system electronics
will be restored.
2. Press the Reset gantry key on the gantry panel.
 Power to the gantry drives, X-ray system and table drive will be restored.

Emergency Patient Care During X-Ray ON:


• Press STOP SCAN to abort x-ray and stop gantry/table movement.
• Press PAUSE SCAN to pause scanning after the current scan completes.

3-54 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

• During an exam, the system pauses between scans if you Press any button on the
control panel other than the alignment lights. It stops X-Ray if you Press the same
button(s) during a scan.
• Select Resume on the screen to continue the exam.

Emergency Egress
System operation may be stopped due to power failure or a safety event (something coming
into contact with the collision sensors), or the system may be halted by the operator in
response to emergency conditions.
The Cradle unlatch button should only be used in two situations.
1. In Emergency Egress situations.
2. When using the SmartStep scan type.

To safely remove the patient:


1. Press the Cradle Release gantry key or the Emergency Stop button (Figure 3-26) to
disengage the clutch
2. Pull the cradle to its out position, using the Cradle Lip or Cradle Handle (Figure 3-26).
3. Assist the patient off the table.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-55


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Maintenance and Cleaning


 To guarantee safe, reliable equipment performance, the site must be prepared
according to GE Medical Systems requirements, as specified in the Pre-Installation
Manual.
 There are no user serviceable parts in this system. The product should be installed,
maintained and serviced by qualified service personnel according to procedures laid
down in the product service manuals.
 The system in whole or in part should not be modified in any way without prior
written approval by GE Medical Systems.
 Keep the equipment clean. Remove body fluids and/or IV spills to prevent a health
risk and damage to internal parts. Clean the equipment with any of the following
Approved Cleaning Agents:
– Warm water and soap or a mild antiseptic
– Common household bleach, diluted 10:1
– Sani-cloth HB
– Perasafe
– Incidin Plus
– TriGene
 Also, use dry cleaning for electro components.
 Do not clean the connectors on the cables for ECG, Respiratory equipment etc. If you
need to clean them contact GE Service.
 Planned maintenance must be carried out regularly to ensure safe operation of the
equipment.
 For user maintenance of the system and performance tests, refer to the
maintenance and calibration information in the Technical Reference Manual.

3-56 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Cleaning Equipment (Bio Hazard)

CAUTION: Blood Bourne Pathogens Procedure - Before any equipment is serviced or


returned to GE Medical Systems, the following criteria must be met:
 Equipment used in a clinical setting must be cleaned and free of any blood and other
infectious substances.
 Customers are responsible for the sanitary condition of the equipment. The
suggested equipment clean-up procedure for cleaning any fluids or matter
discovered in accessible areas or inside under direction of service are as follows:
– Wear personal protective equipment.
– Wear proper Nitrile gloves.
– Before cleanup take note of sharp corners or objects that could cut the gloves. If
gloves tear, remove, wash hands thoroughly and re-glove.
– Use cloth or paper towels along with cleaner, taking care not to splash.
– Sanitize the area using common bleach diluted 10:1 or an Approved Cleaning
Agent listed in the Maintenance and Cleaning section. Clean any tools that come
in contact with body fluid.
– Since viruses require moisture to remain active, dry the entire area.
– When confident the area is clean and dry, place cleaning materials in a red
biohazard bag.
– Remove gloves, turning them inside out, and put gloves in the biohazard plastic
bag. Seal and give the bag to appropriate personnel for disposal.

Environmental Concerns
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment
must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected
separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for
information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-57


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Name and Concentration of Hazardous Substances

Explanation of Pollution Control Label


This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous materials in excess
of the limits established by the Chinese standard SJ/T11363-2006
Requirements for Concentration Limits for Certain Hazardous Substances in
Electronic Information Products. The number in the symbol is the
Environment-friendly Use Period (EFUP), which indicates the period during
which the toxic or hazardous substances or elements contained in
electronic information products will not leak or mutate under normal operating conditions
so that the use of such electronic information products will not result in any severe
environmental pollution, any bodily injury or damage to any assets. The unit of the period is
"Year".
In order to maintain the declared EFUP, the product shall be operated normally according to
the instructions and environmental conditions as defined in the product manual, and
periodic maintenance schedules specified in Product Maintenance Procedures shall be
followed strictly.
Consumables or certain parts may have their own label with an EFUP value less than the
product. Periodic replacement of those consumables or parts to maintain the declared EFUP
shall be done in accordance with the Product Maintenance Procedures.
This product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, and must be collected
separately and handled properly after decommissioning.

3-58 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Safety

Table 3-4 Table of hazardous substances' name and concentration

Hazardous substances' name


Component Name
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
Operator Console X O O X O O
Gantry X O X X X X
LCD Monitor O X O O O O
ECG Cardiac Trigger X O O X X X
Power Distribution Unit X O X X X X
Patient Table X O X X X X
• O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the
homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
• X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the
homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.
– Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of
publication
– Applications of hazardous substances in this medical device are required to
achieve its intended clinical uses, and/or to provide better protection to human
beings and/or to environment, due to lack of reasonably (economically or
technically) available substitutes.

This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or
disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this system, the
backlight lamps in the monitor display contain mercury.)
The X-Ray Collimator contains the following potentially hazardous materials:
 Lead: Lead salts are toxic and their ingestion may cause serious problems. The
manipulation/ handling of lead is subject to regulations.

WARNING: Do not discard the X-Ray Tube Assembly among industrial waste or domestic
garbage.

WARNING: A damaged X-ray Tube Assembly should not be dispatched through the
national postal service.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 3-59


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

The X-Ray Tube Assembly contains the following potentially hazardous materials:
 Lead: Lead salts are toxic and their ingestion may cause serious problems. The
manipulation/ handling of lead is subject to regulations.
 Oil: Univolt 54 and Crosstrans 206 mineral oil are not toxic, but the prevailing
environmental regulations should be observed for their disposal or recuperation. For
example, it is forbidden to dispose of these oils in the wastewater or sewage system
or in the natural environment.
Your local GEMS field service will advise you on the suitable means of disposal of equipment.
 The X-Ray Tube Assembly to be discarded should be forwarded to the GEMS Service
network, and it will be disposed of in a GEMS recycling center.

Precautions
Take all the necessary precautions for the personnel handling the recovery or destruction of
X-Ray Tube Assemblies, and in particular against the risks due to lead.
These personnel must be informed of the danger involved and of the necessity to observe
the safety measures.

3-60 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Accessing the Learning and Reference Guide

Chapter 4
Accessing the Learning and
Reference Guide

The Learning and Reference Guide is designed to get you up and running your system. It is
recommended that each system operator review the complete Learning and Reference
Guide.
To start the Learning and Reference Guide:
• Select the [Learning Solutions] icon.
• Select the language you wish to review in.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 4-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

4-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Tube Warmup

Chapter 5
Tube Warmup

To maintain image quality and long tube life, complete the Warmup procedure.
• Display the Scan Monitor screen.
• Select Daily Prep and Tube Warmup to display the Warmup screen.
– When you haven't used the X-Ray tube for more than three hours
– Fastcal - Tube warmup runs automatically when Fastcal is selected.
– Before Calcheck
– Before system calibration
GE suggests you warm up the tube after every three hours of non-use.
• The system displays the following message on the Scan Monitor screen:
More than 2 hours have elapsed since the last scan. Tube needs warming.
NOTE: Tube warmup will run in Autoscan mode.
• Read the compatibility Warning.
• Position the gantry to 0 tilt.
• Click [Accept] when you understand the implications.
• Tube warmup runs a set of tube heating scans.
• When finished, the system display returns to the daily prep screen.
A message that tube warm-up has been completed will also be in the system message log.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 5-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 5-1 Pop-up warning message during tube warm up

5-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Daily Fast Cal Procedure

Chapter 6
Daily Fast Cal Procedure

To maintain image quality, complete the Fast Cal procedure once a day.
1. Display the Scan Monitor screen.
– Clear the gantry opening.
– Raise the table above the patient loading level.
2. Select [Daily Prep] and [Fast Cal] to display the screen.
– Before the start of every scan day
– Before Cal check
– Before system calibration
3. The system automatically selects the Auto Scan function.
– The system automatically selects the following sequence of scans:
a) Mylar Window Check
b) Cold Warmup
c) Warmup 1
d) Warmup 2
e) Collimator Cal
f) FPA Check Scans
g) Clever Gain Calibration
h) Fast Calibration
NOTE: Some of the warmup scans may not run if tube is sufficently warm before fast cal.
– Follow system instructions to initiate the first scan, and the system acquires the rest
of the scan set.
– Remain near the console during auto scan acquisition, so you can stop X-Ray if
someone enters the scanner room.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 6-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 6-1 Pop-up warning message during fast cal

6-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Prepare the System

Chapter 7
Prepare the System

• Clean the Accessories and check for damage.


• Check and remove dried contrast agent from:
– Mylar ring (around the gantry opening)
– Detector window
– Table extension and cradle surfaces — especially the Patient Restraint plastic
channels on the table
– Accessories (Head holders, pads and cushions, etc.)
• Check supplies.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 7-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

7-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Check Disk Space

Chapter 8
Check Disk Space

Maintain Image and Scan file space on the disk, because the system refuses to scan when it
runs out of file space.

Check Image Space


• Check the daily schedule, and multiply the list of patients by the estimated number of
images each study requires.
• Compare your estimate to the remaining 5122 images listed in the Feature Status Date
and Time area.
• If your estimate exceeds the available Image Space:
– Film any previously unfilmed studies. (Optional)
– Transfer designated images to another suite or console.
– Archive and remove the oldest images from the system disk.
Always follow the filming and archive routines established for your facility.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 8-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

8-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Reset the System

Chapter 9
Reset the System

System Shutdown/Reset Procedures


To prevent system software problems, restart your system once every 24 hours.
(Recommended: Shutdown and restart at the end of the last shift.) If the system has a
persistent problem, record the time, circumstances, and error messages, then call service.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 9-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

9-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Stop/Start the Operating System

Chapter 10
Stop/Start the Operating System

Shutdown System.
To turn off main disconnect control (MDC) or A1, Shutdown the system.
1. On Display Monitor, select the [Shutdown] icon.
 A pop-up attention box appears.

2. Select Shutdown and click OK.


• Shutdown check 1:

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 10-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

If there are open/active patient scan/tube warmup/fastcal or service tool menus, the
attention window below will be seen.

ATTENTION:System shutdown cannot be accomplished when scan acquisition hardware


is in use. End Exam, exit Daily Prep menu or close any open Service Tool before
attempting shutdown.
Click Confirm in the pop-up. End patient exam/tube warmup/fastcal or dismiss the service
tool. Then start from step 1 to select the [Shutdown] icon.
• Shutdown Check 2:
For system with Performix Plus Tube, make sure the gantry is in zero tilt before shutdown,
otherwise the attention message below will be displayed.

10-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Stop/Start the Operating System

ATTENTION:Gantry tilt is not zero. Move gantry to zero tilt to enable Shutdown of the
system.
Click Confirm in the pop-up and return the gantry to zero tilt. Then start from step 1 to
select the [Shutdown] icon.
3. If shutdown check 1 and 2 are passed, pop-ups below will be displayed sequentially.
NOTE: The Dialog1 and Dialog2 below will be posted for only the system with Performix Plus
Tube. Click Confirm in the pop-ups to continue shutdown process.
Dialog1

WARNING: System is preparing for shutdown. The gantry will rotate immediately after
Confirm is pressed.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 10-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Dialog2

ATTENTION:System is waiting for tube rotor to stop.


Dialog3

ATTENTION:System shutting down. Please wait...


• When the system is fully shutdown, the message System Halted is posted.

10-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Stop/Start the Operating System

4. Press the STOP button on the MDC or A1 connector panel or power off the console with
power switch at the front of the console (if no MDC or A1 Control Panel).

If You Turn OFF the MDC at the End of the Scan Day:
To start the system if main disconnect has been powered off:
1. Press the START button on the main disconnect control (A1) to restore power to the PDU,
console(s) and subsystem electronics.
2. Press the RESET button to turn on the Gantry Control panel to restore power to the
Gantry drives, X-Ray system, and Table drive.
• When this dialog disappears and “System Reset Successful“ message is seen in the
feature status area, the system is ready to use.
– Attention
OC is initializing please wait...

For Systems with UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply)


Follow the manufacturer's recommended advice for operating and servicing the UPS
system.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 10-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

10-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Chapter 11
General Information

This section provides a simple introduction to CT, or Computed Tomography, for people with
no detailed physics or medical diagnostic education.

System components:
• The system components are explained in the Learning and Reference Guide.
GE Healthcare products are designed to provide optimum performance with GE-supplied
parts. Accordingly, GE can make no assurances that Equipment performance will not be
affected by the use of non-GE-supplied parts. In some instances use of non-GE-supplied
parts may affect Equipment performance or functionality.
To enhance user awareness when non-GE-supplied tube are in use, the Equipment has been
designed to recognize GE-supplied tubes and report to the user the presence of a
non-GE-supplied tube. This will permit the user to make any adjustments to Equipment use
that the user deems appropriate. Use of the Equipment with non-GE-supplied parts is
always at the user’s discretion. GE assumes no liability for the use of non-GE-supplied parts
and disclaims any responsibility for any affect such parts may have on Equipment
performance.

Emergency Stop:
• Emergency Stop procedures are described in the CT Safety tab.

CT Description
In conventional radiography, X-Rays pass through the patient to a film, which records
anatomic “shadows.” The X-Rays create a planar image, called a radiograph.
In computed tomography, electronic circuits detect and measure the X-Rays, and send
these measurements to a computer system that converts the information to a pixel value
matrix. These pixel values appear as a two dimensional image on a monitor. Even though
CT creates X-Ray exposures, we normally refer to them as images.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Additional computer software permits you to manipulate, shade, rotate, correlate, and
measure the images to derive even more information. The system also provides the means
to store the images on permanent or temporary media.
Conventional radiography can discern tissue density differences of 5%. CT can distinguish
density differences of 1% or less.
Traditional CT systems collect 1 row of data at a time. The LightSpeed Series CT scanner
system may improve customer productivity and open the door for new applications and
unparalleled scan speeds via a revolutionary 16-row data acquisition system.

CT Operation Theory
The PDU (power distribution unit) distributes system power. Power travels from the PDU to
the gantry. The components that produce X-Rays reside inside the gantry. The generator
produces high voltage to the X-Ray tube. High voltage propels electrons from the X-Ray
tube filament to its anode. Heat and x-radiation result.
The X-Ray tube's heat capacity and dissipation determine the frequency and length of CT
exposures. A Helical and Cine exposure can last up to 120 seconds and Axial exposures last
from 0.5 to 4 seconds.
The scintillator material in the detector absorbs the X-Ray that passes through the patient,
and generates a corresponding level of light. The detector converts the light levels into a
corresponding electric current. The DAS (Data Acquisition System) samples each detector
cell in all 16-row detector about 1000 times per rotation, amplifies and quantifies the
existing current, then sends the resulting data to the IG (Image Generator).
Each complete sample by the DAS is called a view. The recon engine converts all the views
into a single matrix of pixel values, called an image. The display processor takes a copy of
the digital matrix data, and converts it into television shades of gray, and sends the image to
the monitor for display. The OC (operator console) contains the monitor and controls the
computer, X-Ray, and cradle drives.

DICOM Print
The LightSpeed Series can send a camera request to a camera that has DICOM print
capabilities.

X-Ray
The X-Ray tube contains filaments, a cathode and an anode. The filament provides the
electrons that create X-Rays. The X-Ray system generates a current that heats the filament
until electrons start to “boil off” and break away from the filament. We refer to the filament
current as “mA.” Increasing the mA increases the number of electrons that become
available to make X-Ray. Higher concentrations of electrons improve image resolution.

11-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

The X-Ray system creates a high voltage, or kV, potential between the cathode and anode.
The negative charge on the cathode repels the electrons that boil off the filament. The
positive are grounded and attracts the negatively charged electrons. The electrons strike
the rotating anode target and displace electrons in the target material. This interaction
creates heat and X-Ray photons. The target rotates to help spread the heat over a larger
area. Increasing the kV increases the electron strike speed, which in turn increases the
intensity or “hardness” of the X-Ray photon beam.

X-ray must reach the detector reference X-Ray Tube


cells at the edges of the selected SFOV.

Centered Patient

Gantry Opening

Detector
DAS

Tube Warmup
Warmup provides an automated group of low technique exposures designed to safely bring
the X-Ray tube to operating temperature before you start to scan for the day. Warmups
increase tube life and help produce more consistent, quality images.

LightSpeed Series Theory of Operation


System Overview
The LightSpeed Series CT scanner is a premium-tier, 3rd generation CT scanner. It will
support all clinical applications currently supported by the LightSpeed product line.

System Characteristics
• New Gantry ID with 4/8/16 slice CT scanner and 16-row (4/8 slice) or 24-row (16 slice)
detector.
• LightSpeed Series optional variable rotation scan speeds (0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 2.0,
3.0, 4.0).
• Helical acquisitions at significantly faster table speeds.
• Potential for new applications due to faster coverage and fewer tube cooling delays.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• The ability to generate 4/8/16 axial images per gantry revolution.


• Every system EMC compliant with improved reliability and uptime.

Tube
Performix Ultra, Performix Plus, MAXIRay CT ULTRA

Detector for 4/8


• 16 rows in Z axis = 16 physically separated cells in Z
• Detector cell segregation in Z provides post-patient collimation.
• 1.25mm effective cell size in Z at ISO center
• up to 8 data rows output.
• Cells summable in Z by FET array to provide various slice thickness.
• Cell summation combinations include:
– 1 x 1.25mm
– 2 x 0.625mm
– 4 x 1.25mm
– 4 x 2.5mm
– 4 x 3.75mm
– 4 x 5.00mm
– 8 x 1.25mm
– 8 x 2.5mm
• Integrated, permanently bonded flex connectors.
Scalable Data Acquisition Sub-System (GDAS)
• 8 (or 4) rows input from detector.
• 8 (or 4) rows output to console.
• Supported by 48 (or 24) interchangeable converter (CNVT) cards.
• 128 input channels/converter card GDAS.
• 31-gain, integrating, front-end pre-amp.
• Supports 1968 Hz sampling.
• Forward error correction applied to output data.
• Control functions:
– Detector FET array and heater control.
– Error detection and reporting.

Detector for 16
• 24 rows in Z axis = 24 physically separated cells in Z 
(HighSpeed CT/i = single cell).
• Detector cell segregation in Z provides post-patient collimation.

11-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

• 2.19mm actual detector cell size in Z.


• 1.25mm effective cell size in Z at ISO center — Outer 8 rows
• 0.625mm effective cell size in Z at ISO center — Inner 16 rows.
• 16 data rows output.
• Cells summable in Z by FET array to provide various slice thickness.
• Cell summation combinations include:
– 1 x 1.25mm
– 2 x 0.625mm
– 4 x 1.25mm
– 4 x 2.5mm
– 4 x 3.75mm
– 4 x 5.00mm
– 8 x 1.25mm
– 8 x 2.5mm
– 16 x 0.625mm
– 16 x 1.25mm
• Integrated, permanently bonded flex connectors.

Scalable Data Acquisition Sub-System (GDAS)


• 16 rows input from detector.
• 16 rows output to console.
• 31-gain, integrating, front-end pre-amp.
• Supports 1968 Hz sampling.
• Forward error correction applied to output data.
• Control functions:
– Detector FET array and heater control.
– Error detection and reporting.

Scalable Data Acquisition Sub-System (MDAS)


• 16 rows input from detector.
• 16 rows output to console.
• Supported by 96 interchangeable converter (CNVT) cards.
• 128 input channels/converter card MDAS.
• 31-gain, integrating, front-end pre-amp.
• Supports 1640 Hz sampling.
• Forward error correction applied to output data.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• Control functions:
– Detector FET array and heater control.
– Error detection and reporting.

11-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Patient Scanning

Parameter LightSpeed Series


ISO Height 1015 mm
Focal spot to ISO 541 mm
Focal spot to det 949 mm
SFOV 496.9 mm
Bore 700 mm

EMI/EMC
All systems built to global regulatory emissions (EMC) and immunity (EMI) compliance
standards to improve reliability, uptime and performance in its intended environment.

Network
Remote Host Parameters
The LightSpeed Series Network function has new enhancements to support DICOM
networking. When adding or updating a remote list, there are some new parameters
needed. All of the following information, except for Comments, needs to be provided in order
to set up a remote host:
• The Host name to be entered is the name of the device. If the device is DICOM, the name
must match exactly to the name given to the device.
• The Network address of the device is provided by the institution's network administrator.
• The Network protocol is DICOM. If the LightSpeed Series will be sending to this device,
the device must be DICOM and the DICOM network protocol must be selected.
• DICOM protocol has a "dialect" which may cause some troubles like disappearances of
some portion of image annotation when connecting to the situation where data transfer
is not confirmed.
• The Port number is unique to the device. If the device is an Advantage Windows
workstation or another LightSpeed system, the number will be 4006.
• The AE Title is unique to the device. If the device is an Advantage Windows workstation
or another GE Healthcare system, the AE Title will be the same as the Host name.
• The Comment field allows you to input a comment.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-7


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• The Archive Node refers to the archiving responsibility of the device:


– If Auto is selected, the CT system will automatically check to see if the device is a
Storage Commitment Provider.
– If Yes is selected, the device will be responsible for archiving images. When the
device has received and saved the images, a notification message will be displayed
on the scanner console and the Archive status for the exam will be “A” for archived.
– If No is selected, the device will not be responsible for archiving.
NOTE: The device must be a Storage Commitment Provider in order for remote archive node
to function.
• Access to the local host refers to the device's ability to access the LightSpeed Series.
Select Yes if you want the device to be able to send to and/or query the LightSpeed
Series.
• The Custom search feature enables the Custom search dialog box to be automatically
displayed when you select receive from the remote browser. If Yes is selected, the
feature is enabled. If No is selected, the Custom search dialog box will not automatically
be displayed. You can, however, get to the search feature once the remote browser is
displayed, by simply selecting Search, on the remote browser.

Network Compatibility
The LightSpeed image format is DICOM. This image format may only be transferred between
systems using a DICOM network protocol. The receiving station must support DICOM receive
for LightSpeed images to be transferred (send or receive) to it.
Use the following table for network compatibility. The table lists the network protocol to use
and the features available for that system. The far left column lists the system the user is at
(from).
Table 11-1 Network Compatibility

From To
LightSpeed/ HiSpeed HiSpeed CT IC HiSpeed 3rd Party
BrightSpeedTM CT/i Advantage NX/i, X/i, or DICOM
QX/i Station
LightSpeed/ DICOM Query DICOM Advantage*** Advantage*** DICOM DICOM*
Send Query Query Query Query Query**
BrightSpeedTM Receive Send Receive Receive Send Send
Receive Receive Receive**
HiSpeed CT/i DICOM DICOM Advantage Advantage DICOM DICOM*
Query Query Query Query Query Query**
Send Send Send Send Send Send
Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive**
HiSpeed DICOM Advantage Advantage Advantage Advantage DICOM
Advantage Send Query Query Query Send Send
Send Send Send
Receive Receive Receive

11-8 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

From To
LightSpeed/ HiSpeed HiSpeed CT IC HiSpeed 3rd Party
BrightSpeedTM CT/i Advantage NX/i, X/i, or DICOM
QX/i Station
CT IC DICOM Advantage Advantage Advantage Advantage DICOM
Send Query Query Query Send Send
Send Send Send
Receive Receive Receive
HiSpeed DICOM DICOM Advantage Advantage DICOM DICOM*
FX/i, DX/I, LX/i Query Query Query Query Query Query**
Send Send Receive Receive Send Send
Receive Receive Receive Receive**
3rd Party DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM*
DICOM  Query Query Query Query Query Query**
Send Send Receive Receive Send Send
Station Receive Receive Receive Receive**

* Some 3rd party stations use the ODINA network protocol. In this case use DICOM protocol
and port number 104.
** Query capability is only available only if station is a query retrieve provider.
*** Advantage Net is not available on PC Base Systems.
NOTE: BrightSpeedTM Elite/Edge/Excel, LightSpeed16, Ultra, Plus, QX/i, or HiSpeed QX/i PC
based systems do not support Advantage Network Protocol.
Table 11-2 Advantage Windows Network Compatibility

From
AW 1.X AW 2.X AW 3.X AW4.X LightSpeed or
BrightSpeedTM
LightSpeed or DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM
HiSpeed QX/i Send Send Send Query Query
Send Send
Receive Receive
AW 1.X SdC Net SdC Net SdC Net SdC Net DICOM
Query Query Query Query Query
Send Send Send Send Send
Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive
AW 2.X SdC Net SdC Net SdC Net SdC Net DICOM
Query Query Query Query Query
Send Send Send Send Send
Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive
AW 3.X SdC Net V1 SdC Net V2 SdC Net V3 SdC Net DICOM
Query Query Query Query Query
Send Send Send Send Send
Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive
AW 4.X SdC Net SdC Net SdC Net SdC Net DICOM
Query Query Query Query Query
Send Send Send Send Send
Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-9


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

NOTE: BrightSpeedTM Elite/Edge/Excel, LightSpeed16, Ultra, Plus, QX/i, or HiSpeed QX/i PC


based systems do not support Advantage Network Protocol.

DICOM IEC Network Form

Purpose of LightSpeed scanner connection to network


The LightSpeed Scanner is intended to be connected to a network in order to support the
following functionality:
• DICOM services to retrieve images from other DICOM-compliant machines
• DICOM services to push images to other DICOM-compliant machines
• DICOM services to query for images on other DICOM-compliant machines
• DICOM services to print images on DICOM complaint printers
• DICOM services to confirm that images have been permanently stored on a
DICOM-compliant machine
• DICOM services to get DICOM modality worklist information from a remote hospital or
radiology department information system computer
• DICOM services to allows a Modality Performed Procedure Step to be communicated to
the Hospital/Radiology information system
• DICOM services to verify the remote DICOM system is connected properly to the HD
scanner device
• Services to provide authentication and authorization against Enterprise directory
servers
All of the above features are optional on the LightSpeed Scanner.

11-10 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Network interface technical specifications


Connection Name: Hospital network port
Physical network connection type: IEEE 802.3-1998 1000/100/10 BaseT Ethernet
Speeds and duplex modes supported: 10Mbps, 100Mbps, and 1Gbps half and full
duplex
Auto-negotiate
Default IP Address (from factory): IP Address – 192.9.101.1
Subnet Mask – 255.255.255.0
Gateway – empty
IP addressing: IPv4 static
QoS Support: n/a

Network information flows specifications


Flow Name DICOM image retrieve
Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Get a DICOM image or set of image from a
network device
Licensed/optional/required optional
Communication Any network device supporting the DICOM
Partner application layer protocol(s) listed below
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols TCP/IP
Application Layer Protocol and CT Image Storage
Encoding MR Image Storage
Enhanced SR
X-Ray Radiation Dose SR – CT Radiation Dose
RT Structure Set Storage
Positron Emission Tomography Image Storage
Ports (default) 4006
Traffic characterization and Bandwidth On demand, local user initiated. The bandwidth
Requirements is dependent on the local site.
Latency max n/a

Flow Name DICOM image push


Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Send a DICOM image or a set of images to a
network device
Licensed/optional/required optional

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-11


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Communication Any network device supporting the DICOM


Partner application layer protocol(s) listed below
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols TCP/IP
Application Layer Protocol and CT Image Storage
Encoding MR Image Storage
Grayscale Softcopy Presentation Sate Storage
Enhanced SR
X-Ray Radiation Dose SR – CT Radiation Dose
RT Structure Set Storage
Positron Emission Tomography Image Storage
Ports (default) 4006
Traffic characterization and Bandwidth On demand, local user initiated. The bandwidth
Requirements is dependent on the local site.
Latency max n/a

Flow Name DICOM image query


Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Find a list of DICOM images from a network
device
Licensed/optional/required optional
Communication Any network device supporting the DICOM
Partner application layer protocol(s) listed below
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols TCP/IP
Application Layer Protocol and Study Root Query/Retrieve Information Model -
Encoding FIND
Study Root Query/Retrieve Information Model -
MOVE
Ports (default) 4006
Traffic characterization and Bandwidth On demand, local user initiated. The bandwidth
Requirements is dependent on the local site.
Latency max n/a

Flow Name DICOM Storage Commit


Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Used to confirm that local DICOM images have
been permanently stored on a remote DICOM
device
Licensed/optional/required optional

11-12 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Communication Any network device supporting the DICOM


Partner application layer protocol(s) listed below
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols TCP/IP
Application Layer Protocol and Storage Commitment Push Model SOP Class
Encoding
Ports (default) 4006
Traffic characterization and Bandwidth On demand, local user initiated. The bandwidth
Requirements is dependent on the local site.
Latency max n/a

Flow Name DICOM modality worklist information


Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Transfer patient information for HIS/RIS system
to CT scanner
Licensed/optional/required optional
Communication Any network device supporting the DICOM
Partner application layer protocol(s) listed below
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols TCP/IP
Application Layer Protocol and Basic Modality Worklist Information Model –
Encoding FIND SOP Class
Ports (default) 4006
Traffic characterization and Bandwidth On demand, local user initiated. The bandwidth
Requirements is dependent on the local site.
Latency max n/a

Flow Name Modality Performed Procedure Step


Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Send a report about a performed patient exam
to the HIS/RIS system
Licensed/optional/required optional
Communication Any network device supporting the DICOM
Partner application layer protocol(s) listed below
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols TCP/IP
Application Layer Protocol and Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class
Encoding

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-13


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Ports (default) 4006


Traffic characterization and Bandwidth On demand, local user initiated. The bandwidth
Requirements is dependent on the local site.
Latency max n/a

Flow Name DICOM Print


Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Send a DICOM image to a DICOM printer
Licensed/optional/required optional
Communication Any network device supporting the DICOM
Partner application layer protocol(s) listed below
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols TCP/IP
Application Layer Protocol and Basic Grayscale Print Management Meta SOP
Encoding Class
Basic Color Print Management Meta SOP Class
Print Job SOP Class
Pinter SOP Class
Ports (default) 4006
Traffic characterization and Bandwidth On demand, local user initiated. The bandwidth
Requirements is dependent on the local site.
Latency max n/a

Flow Name Enterprise Authentication / Authorization


Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Authenticate local user against Enterprise Server
Licensed/optional/required optional
Communication Any network device supporting the enterprise
Partner directory servers supported by the CT Scanner
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols TCP/IP
Application Layer Protocol and Microsoft Active Directory / Novell eDirectroy
Encoding
Ports (default) 3002, 3003, 3004, 6386
Traffic characterization and Bandwidth On demand, local user initiated. The bandwidth
Requirements is dependent on the local site.
Latency max n/a

11-14 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Flow Name DNS


Network Connection on device Hospital network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Network services
Licensed/optional/required optional
Communication Hospital DNS Server
Partner
Device/IP Address/Network
Middle Layer Protocols UDP
Application Layer Protocol and DNS
Encoding
Ports (default) 53
Traffic characterization and Bandwidth Initiated by scanner network software
Requirements sporadically as required to translate a remote
host name into an IP address
Latency max n/a

Required characteristics and configuration of network for support of


LightSpeed Scanner specifications
The network must meet the specific requirements above for all traffic flows associated with
the subset of features, use cases and workflow required by the responsible organization’s
users.
In addition, the network must be “flat” (i.e. limited to a single IP broadcast domain).

System Data and Control Flow


F
Table
Generator
Controller
Data Flow 
D E
Stationary On Rotation
Control Flow Controller Processor Tube

Real-time Control Flow 



H Cam
 Collimator
G
 
 Slip Ring

UIF Monitor Detector



Host
Computer DAS
 

Keyboard

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-15


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Component Functions Data and Control Flows


Host User interface, image display 1 Scan and recon prescription from
Computer operator
TGP Stationary base real-time 2 Scan parameters distributed
control and “master” a. table position
controller b. rotating parameters
ORP (On Rotating base real-time c. kV and mA selections
Rotation control d. X-Ray beam collimation and filter
Processor) selections
Table Patient table real-time control e. detector slice thickness and DAS gain
Controller selections
Slip-ring Signal and power transfer 3 Real-time control signals during scanning
between stationary and
rotating components
Generator High voltage generation 4 High voltage
Tube X-ray generation 5 Un-collimated X-Ray beam
Cam Formation of the X-Ray beam 6 Collimated X-Ray beam
Collimator
Detector Conversion of X-Ray to analog 7 Analog scan data
signal data
DAS Conversion of analog signal 8 Digital scan data
data to digital data

X-ray Generation and Detection Details


Overview
The distinguishing feature of LightSpeed Series is the capability to simultaneously collect
multiple rows of scan data.
Gantry Coordinate System
X, Y, Z: Scanner gantry coordinate system:
• X = Tangent to circle of rotation.
• Y = Radial (from ISO toward tube focal spot).
• Z = Longitudinal (in/out of the scan plane).

11-16 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

X X-Ray Tube Focal Spot

ISO
Scan Plane
Z
Patient Table

Components
Figure 11-1 X-ray generation and detection components viewed from side of gantry

Anode/Target
Tube

Cathode
Bowtie
Cam Collimator Uncollimated X-Ray Beam
Tungsten Cams

Front of Gantry Collimated X-Ray Beam

LightSpeed 5.X Detector=


Continuous Collimator +
57×16 Row Detector Modules

Detector Collimator
16 Individual Lumex Cells
FET Array

Integrated Flex:
16 Columns x
2 Macro Rows=
Z 32 Signals/flex

CAM Collimator
The pre-patient collimation of the X-Ray beam is accomplished via 2 independently
controlled tungsten cams (refer to Illustration 11-2).

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-17


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 11-2 CAM collimator examples

Focal Spot
Offset

Cam Offset
Beam Offset
Wide Beam Narrow Beam Narrow Beam
Centered Centered Cams Offset in Z
e.g. 4x5mm Slices e.g. 4x1.25mm Slices e.g. 4x1.25mm Slices
or
8x2.5mm Slices Offset used to compensate for
Z axis beam offset.

Z-Axis Cell Summation


The LightSpeed Series detector is segmented into cells in the Z dimension, providing
post-patient collimation of the X-Ray beam. This post-patient collimation is provided by the
segmentation of the detector cells, and not by a separate post-patient collimator as some
CT systems use.
The post-patient collimation, along with summation of cells in the Z direction by the detector
FET array, determines the Z-axis slice thickness of the scan data.
The Z dimension extent of each cell are 0.625mm at ISO center for the center 16 rows and
1.25mm for the outer 8 rows.
1, 2, 3 or 4 cells are summed in Z to produce a “macro cell.” All macro cells in the same Z
plane form a “macro row.” A macro row consisting of a single cell in each column produces
scan data with thickness of either 0.625mm or 1.25mm at ISO center (see Illustration 11-3). A
macro row consisting of summed cells in each column produces scan data with varied
thickness at ISO center (see Illustration 11-3). The 16 macro rows are labeled 8A, 7A, 6A, 5A,
4A, 3A, 2A, 1A, 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B, and 8B. 8A is closest to the patient table. Each flex
transmits 8 macro cells to the DAS per column x 16 columns per detector module = 128 data
channels per flex (Figure 11-3).

11-18 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Figure 11-3 Channel summation in Z — Examples


Tungsten Cams
Patient Table Tungsten Cams Patient Table 20mm Collimation
10mm Collimation

16x0.625 16x1.25

8A, 7A, 6A
, 5A, 4A, 3A, 2A, 1A 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B, 8B 8A, 7A, 6A
, 5A, 4A, 3A, 2A, 1A 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B, 8B

Tungsten Cams
Tungsten Cams Patient Table
Patient Table 10mm Collimation
20mm Collimation

8x1.25 8x2.5

4A, 3A, 2A
, 1A 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B 4A, 3A, 2A
, 1A 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B

Collimator Theory
The purpose of tracking is to follow the focal spot so that we can keep the uniform X-ray of
the narrowest possible beam on the detector to reduce dose and still avoid artifacts.
The focal spot moves in Z due to thermal changes in the tube and a mechanical forces
during gantry rotation and tilt angle.
Each cam is basically an independent system.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-19


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

What does tracking do?

focal Closed loop repositions collimator


spot to hold the beam steady
Collimator Control 1 measure position of X-ray beam
Board (CCB)
2 compute new collimator position
Stepper motor 3 move collimator to follow the focal spot
repositions cams

Data channels that make


the image stay in flat X-ray
DAS Control Board
(DCB) Z axis module operates partly
Compute new cam position in the X-ray shadow
from z cell signal ratio
Position of X-ray shadow on Z
cells determines the signal ratio

With Fast response to keep beam centered on the detector

In the Hi Res mode (1i x 1.25 mode) the collimator


projects an X-ray beam on a single 1.25 mm detector row.
Only 1 image per rotation is generated at the lowest
possible single slice dose.

System Operational Modes


Overview
• Scout
• Axial
• Helical
• Cardiac Helical
• Cine

Scout
Scout imaging is used for anatomical location in conjunction with scan and recon
prescription, to provide an anatomical cross-reference for axial images, and to provide quick
feedback to the user as to the anatomy scanned. Scout supports the following features:
• Less than 10 second reconstruction.
• All kV and mA stations available, dependant on generator and tube limitations.
• 1.25 mm resolution in Z.
• 100 mm/sec table speed.

11-20 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

• Data collected in 4 x 1.25 mm mode. Reconstruction algorithms “combine” data to


maintain 1.25 mm resolution in Z.

Pediatric Imaging
Adult techniques and protocols should not be used on pediatric patients (under 2 years of
age.)

Axial and Cine


For radiation oncology imaging, Axial and Cine scan modes continues to be commonly
practiced mode of acquisition. Especially for Respiratory Gating.
Axial and Cine imaging features include:
• All kV and mA stations available, dependant on generator and tube limitations.
• Scan speeds: 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 seconds.
• Cine: 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0 seconds.
• Variable image thickness.
• Sample rates: 984 Hz, 1090Hz, 1230Hz, 1400Hz, 1640Hz, 1968Hz support 0.5 seconds
scanning.
• Segmented reconstruction option for cine scans.
LightSpeed Series can acquire 16 axial slices in a single rotation. These slices can be
reconstructed independently to produce 16 images. These images may be combined to
produce composite images. For example:
Data collected in 16 x 1.25 mode
(16i) 16 x 1.25 mm images
(4i) 4 x 5.00 mm images
(2i) 2 x 10.00 mm images
Helical

Helical Overview
The 24-row detector and 16-row DAS provide the greatest benefits when used in the helical
mode. In the helical mode, data from 16 detector rows is selectively combined and weighted
during reconstruction in order to achieve the optimal balance between image z-axis
resolution, noise, and helical artifacts.
Helical imaging features include:
• All kV and mA stations available, dependant on generator and tube limitations.
• 120 second maximum helical scan time.
• Pitches:

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-21


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

NOTE: Beginning with the LightSpeed Series M3.1 release, the user interface has changed
the scan mode names. These new names indicate pitch as expressed by the ratio of
table travel per rotation to beam collimation. The new scan mode name designation
will be indicated on image annotation.

Previous Scan Mode


Scan Mode
Designator

HQ 1:1
HQ 0.75:1
HS 1.5:1
UQ 0.625:1
UM 0.875:1
UF 1.35:1
US 1.675:1

• Variable image thickness (recon parameter).


• Sample Rates: 984 Hz, 1090Hz, 1230Hz, 1400Hz, 1640Hz
• Segmented reconstruction option.
• 0.1mm minimum incremental retrospective recon image spacing.
Once the LightSpeed Series helical data is collected, it can be reconstructed at image
thickness greater than or equal to 1x the detector macro-row size. Premium image quality
(near axial image quality) is achieved at 2x the detector macro-row size. The thinnest image
thickness possible, which has image quality slightly degraded from 1.5:1 pitch on HiSpeed
CT/i, is 1x the detector macro-row size.

Premium Image Quality Helical Example


Premium image quality (near axial image quality) is achieved as follows:
• Detector macro-row size = 50% of the desired image slice thickness.
• Pitch (table travel over beam collimation) = 0.625:1.
LightSpeed Series “Premium” IQ example for 8 slice mode:
• 5mm image
• 8x 2.5 mm detector mode
• Table speed of 6.25 mm/rotation (0.5625:1)
LightSpeed Series “Premium” IQ example for 16slice mode:
• 0.5625:1 mode
• 5mm image

11-22 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

• 16x 0.625mm detector mode


• 5.625 mm/rotation

Cardiac Helical Overview


A lower pitch helical scan is available for cardiac applications in conjunction with the CardIQ
SnapShot option. In this scanning mode, heart rate monitoring is performed during the
helical acquisition and the associated ECG gating information is stored with the scan data
such that a cardiac gated SnapShot reconstruction algorithm can be applied for prospective
and retrospective images. SnapShot reconstruction is used to minimize the motion of the
heart in the resultant images. The pitch factor for the cardiac helical scan is determined by
the system and is a function of the patient heart rate.
Cardiac Helical imaging features include:
• All kV and mA stations available, dependent on generator and tube limitations.
• 120 second maximum cardiac helical scan time.
• Pitches: determined by system, ranging from 0.25 to 0.35, based on patient heart rate. A
higher heart rate will use a higher pitch factor.
• Variable image thickness via acquisition slice thickness parameter only (0.625, 1.25, 2.5,
3.75, and 5.0mm). No image thickness recon parameter is available.
• SnapShot Segment Burst and Burst+ and Segmented (non-gated) reconstruction
options.
• Cardiac phase location parameter of 0 to 99% of R-to-R cycle.
• 0.1mm minimum incremental retrospective recon image spacing.
Once the cardiac helical data has been collected, it can be reconstructed at one or more
arbitrary heart cycle phase locations. Segmented reconstruction is also available
retrospectively if non-gated images are desired.

Calibration Modes
LightSpeed Series calibrations include:
• Z-axis gain calibration - new for LightSpeed Series
• Tube warm-up
• Air calibration*
• Phantom calibration*, upgrades for 50cm SFOV
• Water Cal
• IQ Cal check
* = similar to HiSpeed, upgraded for 16 row data collection

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-23


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Current X-Ray Tube Capacity Effects Prescriptions and


Interscan Delays
The system provides prescription alternatives when:
• Current prescription requires excessive prep, interscan, or intergroup delay.
• Technique requirements exceed the prescribed delays.
Although the rotating anode increases the tube's heat tolerance, it still has a physical limit.
The anode transfers its heat to the oil filled tube housing. The housing, in turn, dissipates
heat into the surrounding air.
The system keeps a running total of estimated tube heat. When you request scans during
Scan Prescription, the system estimates the number of heat units these scans will produce,
and compares this value with the running total.
If the prescription estimate exceeds the current capacity, the system displays a series of
prescription Optimize screens that recommend increased delays, alternative Scan Technic
settings, or offer to split the current scan group into smaller groups.

Focal Spot
The X-Ray tube contains a small filament and a large filament. The small filament
concentrates the focal spot size, which improves spatial resolution but cannot tolerate high
technique. The large filament tolerates high technique but loses some of the small
filament’s spatial resolution.
The system automatically selects the small filament:
• When the technique equals 24kW, or less.
The system automatically selects the large filament:
• When the technique exceeds 24kW.
Example: Reduce mA setting from 210mA to 200mA (120kV) to enable Small Filament.

Filament Selection
On traditional single-slice CT systems, such as HiSpeed CT/i, the filament selection effects
the slice thickness for thin slices scanning, with a larger filament producing a larger effective
slice thickness. The LightSpeed Series has eliminated this effect, and true thin slice imaging
can be achieved using both the small and large filament.

Filament Selection Table


In order to provide the best image quality, and maximize patient throughput, the LightSpeed
Series system bases the automatic filament selection upon the following table:

11-24 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Performix Ultra Tube


Performix Plus Tube
MAXIRay CT ULTRA Tube
Small Filament Large Filament
All Algorithms All Algorithms
80 kV 10 to 300 mA > 300 mA
100 kV 10 to 240 mA > 240 mA
120 kV 10 to 200 mA > 200 mA
140 kV 10 to 170 mA > 170 mA

Data Collection
The detector and DAS assembly mounts opposite the X-Ray tube on the rotating base. The
X-Ray beam leaves the X-Ray tube, passes through the gantry opening, and enters the
detector. Any material (patient or phantom) positioned within the gantry opening absorbs or
deflects the weaker X-Ray photons. The numbers of photons that enter the detector
depends upon the intensity of the X-Ray beam and the density of the material in the gantry
opening. An increase in density causes a decrease in the number of photons that enter the
detector.
The revolutionary new LightSpeed detector allows 16 rows of data to be collected at a time
for both axial and helical imaging. This allows 4 axial images to be generated in a single
gantry rotation in the axial mode. This allows helical images to be taken at faster speeds,
and with lower power, than single slice scanners.
The DAS measures the detected X-Ray at regular time intervals, called views, and transmits
the information to the image reconstructor for reconstruction into a display image. The
total degrees of gantry rotation and the scan time determine the number of raw views per
image.
For scans greater than 1 second, the raw views are summed together before image
reconstruction. This allows the system to maintain constant image reconstruction times and
spatial resolution/aliasing for all scan speeds. (Note that image reconstruction of more raw
views reduces aliasing at the expense of reconstruction time.)
Example: A 1-second and a 4-second scan both gather data over 360 degrees, so both
scans reconstruct the same number of views per image. A segmented reconstruction uses
data acquired over 235 degrees, so it reconstructs fewer views per image.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-25


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Scan Parameters

Scan Choice Determines:


kV X-Ray energy intensity and calibration data used
mA X-Ray dose
Scan Time and Length of scan rotation in seconds; length of delay in
Interscan Delay seconds between exposures
Scan Rotation Degrees of scan rotation during data collection
(normal scan, partial scan) (X-Ray on)
Gantry Tilt Angle X-Ray travels through patient
Spacing Z-Axis distance between scan centers
Thickness Width of image
Azimuth X-Ray tube location during scout scan
Centimeters of data available, and any special
SFOV — Scan Field of View processing applied or available, for image
reconstruction.

Reconstruction
The scanner compares the collected data with the calibration data then converts the
detector channel views into a two dimensional matrix. The system converts each matrix
element (pixel) into a CT number. The system displays a scout image as it acquires the data,
but an axial image will be displayed after reconstruction is completed. The axial and scout
images take approximately one second to reconstruct.
Reconstruction Algorithm: Soft, Std, Detail, Bone, Lung, Edge, Bone Plus.
Your choices control the image outcome. Choose parameters to enhance or tailor the
acquisition and processing to the anatomy of interest. Select scan technique and image
parameters that provide optimum resolution.
The system has disk space for 1500 scan files or 2400 (16 slice) scan rotations. The system
stores the most recent scan data in the oldest scan file with an unreserved status. The
system continually overwrites the scan files with data.

11-26 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

CAUTION: If you plan to reconstruct images, you must use files that reside in the disk.
Either reserve the scan files you plan to retrospectively reconstruct, or
reconstruct unsaved scan files before the system overwrites the files with
new scan data. The system refuses to overwrite reserved scan files.
Remember to release the reserved scan files when you finish retrospective
reconstruction.

Helical Scan Data Usage


In general, every data channel will contribute to at least one image during helical image
reconstruction. Some data channels are not used at the very beginning and end of the
helical scan due to to the physics of multi-slice scanning and helical view weighting
algorithms.
During helical image reconstruction, some data channels in the middle of the helical scan
are not used if the image interval prescribed is GREATER THAN the values listed in the table
below.
For example, all data channels will be used for 1.25 mm images, 0.562 pitch, if the image
interval is less than or equal to 1.24 mm.

Channel Utilization Table-Full Modes


Scan Mode Image Thickness
Table Detector
Helical Speed row 0.625m 1.25mm 2.5mm 3.75mm 5.0mm 7.5mm 10mm
Pitch (mm/rot) collimation m
(mm)
0.562:1 5.625 0.625 0.68 2.18 4.76 4.98 5.36
11.25 1.25 1.25 4.52 6.96 9.32 10.71 10.84
0.938:1 9.375 0.625 0.93 2.34 4.98 5.31 5.74
18.75 1.25 1.87 4.82 7.34 9.22 9.97 11.85
1.375:1 13.75 0.625 1.24 2.65 5.28 5.60 6.04
27.5 1.25 2.49 5.42 7.94 10.01 10.56 11.93
1.75:1 17.5 0.625 1.24 2.65 5.28 5.60 6.05
35.0 1.25 2.49 5.44 7.93 9.99 10.56 11.95
0.625:1 6.25 1.25 1.24 4.45 6.80 5.74 8.10 10.60
12.5 2.5 2.49 6.78 10.77 15.70 16.72
0.875:1 8.75 1.25 1.24 4.38 6.94 5.74 8.11 10.61
17.5 2.5 2.49 6.79 11.04 15.70 16.72
1.35:1 13.5 1.25 2.50 6.24 7.18 7.23 9.60 11.98
27.0 2.5 4.99 9.47 11.69 14.98 14.02
1.675:1 16.75 1.25 2.49 4.97 6.33 7.81 9.57 11.92
33.5 2.5 4.97 9.60 10.18 15.15 13.96

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-27


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Channel Utilization Table-Plus Modes


Scan Mode Image Thickness
Table Detector
Helical Speed row 0.625m 1.25mm 2.5mm 3.75mm 5.0mm 7.5mm 10mm
Pitch (mm/rot) collimation m
(mm)
0.562:1 5.625 0.625 1.20 2.72 4.66 5.29 6.41
11.25 1.25 2.49 6.16 8.96 9.32 10.71 12.98
0.938:1 9.375 0.625 1.51 2.93 5.30 5.61 6.70
18.75 1.25 3.11 6.29 9.22 9.36 10.84 13.34
1.375:1 13.75 0.625 1.82 3.24 5.39 5.90 7.08
27.5 1.25 3.97 6.88 9.31 11.07 11.43 13.92
1.75:1 17.5 0.625 1.82 3.24 5.39 5.90 7.08
35.0 1.25 3.98 6.90 9.32 11.06 11.45 13.94
0.625:1 6.25 1.25 2.24 6.17 8.24 10.23 10.79 12.72
12.5 2.5 4.67 8.35 11.22 15.46 22.21
0.875:1 8.75 1.25 2.36 4.72 8.47 10.24 10.80 12.73
17.5 2.5 4.84 8.48 11.22 16.22 20.22
1.35:1 13.5 1.25 3.87 4.65 9.25 10.61 12.98 13.86
27.0 2.5 7.74 9.99 13.47 15.83 16.60
1.675:1 16.75 1.25 3.97 6.42 9.29 10.67 13.04 13.91
33.5 2.5 7.93 10.18 13.65 16.00 16.75

Nominal Helical Slice Thickness


Because the data for a helical image is weighted over more than one rotation, to provide the
best possible image quality the nominal image slice may differ slightly from the user
selection, dependent on table speed, pitch and slice selection. The nominal FWHM slice
widths are given in the following table.

Slice Thickness Full Mode

Selected Slice
Scan Table
Mode Speed 0.625mm 1.25mm 2.5mm 3.75mm 5.0mm 7.5mm 10mm
(mm/rot)
Axial N/A 0.60 1.09 2.34 3.75 4.84 7.35 9.84
Helical 5.625 0.63 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00
0.562:1 11.25 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
Helical 9.375 0.85 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00
0.938:1 18.75 1.6 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
Helical 13.75 0.80 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00
1.375:1 27.5 1.60 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
Helical 17.5 0.85 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00
1.75:1 35.0 1.60 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00

11-28 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Selected Slice
Scan Table
Mode Speed 0.625mm 1.25mm 2.5mm 3.75mm 5.0mm 7.5mm 10mm
(mm/rot)
Helical 6.25 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
0.625:1 12.5 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
Helical 8.75 1.25 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
0.875:1 17.5 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
Helical 13.5 1.60 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
1.35:1 27.0 3.20 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
Helical 16.75 1.70 2.50 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00
1.675:1 33.5 3.20 3.75 5.00 7.50 10.00

Slice Thickness Plus Mode

Selected Slice
Scan Table
Mode Speed 0.625mm 1.25mm 2.5mm 3.75mm 5.0mm 7.5mm 10mm
(mm/rot)
Helical 5.625 0.75* 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00
0.562:1 11.25 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
Helical 9.375 0.92** 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00
0.938:1 18.75 1.90 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
Helical 13.75 1.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00
1.375:1 27.5 1.90 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
Helical 17.5 1.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00
1.75:1 35.0 1.90 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
Helical 6.25 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
0.625:1 12.5 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
Helical 8.75 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
0.875:1 17.5 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
Helical 13.5 2.00 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
1.35:1 27.0 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
Helical 16.75 2.00 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00
1.675:1 33.5 3.00 4.50 6.00 9.00 12.00

Note: * Head SFOV 0.95 mm


Note: ** Head SFOV 1.0 mm

Cardiac Helical Slice Profiles


Slice profile measurements for Cardiac helical scans are complicated by the fact that a
variable helical pitch is chosen based on the patient’s heart rate. For helical pitches greater
than 0.125, the full width half max of a slice collimated at 0.625 is approximately 0.8mm
(16x0.625 mode), 1.25 is approximately 1.6mm (16x1.25, 8x1.25, 4x1.25 mode) and 2.5 is
approximately 3.2mm (8x2.5, 4x2.5 mode).

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-29


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

When a pitch value significantly below 0.125 is chosen, the slice profile may vary
significantly from image to image in a single helical scan. The profile will depend on the
location of the prescribed image with respect to the detector locations. The variation in the
slice profiles can be understood by thinking of an axial scan. In an axial scan, an arbitrary
image location is not permitted. However, an attempt to create an image at an intermediate
location could be performed by using data from adjacent detector rows. This would result in
an increased slice profile. As the pitch becomes much less than 2.0, the helical scan data
becomes more and more like axial scan data.
At a pitch of 1.4, for example, which is the prescribed pitch for a Cardiac Segment scan with
a patient heartrate of 60 bpm and gantry period of 0.5 sec, a 35% variation in the nominal
FWHM is possible.

Calibration Scans
Calibrations scans of air, and uniform objects called phantoms, provide the baseline
information the system needs to produce patient images. The system needs calibration
data for every possible combination of kV, detector row thickness, focal spot size, and scan
field of view.

Warm-up Required
Warm-up the tube:
• Immediately before Cal Check.
• Immediately before Calibration.
• When the tube has cooled to the point that a warm-up is required to ensure optimal
image quality.

Data Storage

NIO16 console
The Console/Computer contains 292 gigabytes (Gb) of magnetic disk that records and
retains 1500 scan files or 9600 (16slice) scan rotations, a Reconstruction Processor that
processes scan data into image data, and a magnetic disk that stores CT specific scan
software.
The computer contains 146 gigabytes (Gb) of system disk that hold about 250,000
uncompressed 5122 image files, along with software.
Despite storage space, the system eventually runs out of disk space. If your facility plans to
preserve image data, you must periodically transfer images and scan information to the
designated archive media.

11-30 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

GOC4 console
The Console/Computer contains 36 gigabytes (Gb) of magnetic disk that records and retains
2900 1-second scan rotation files, a Reconstruction Processor that processes scan data into
image data, and a magnetic disk that stores CT specific scan software.
The computer contains 73 gigabytes (Gb) of system disk that hold about 130,000
uncompressed 5122 image files, along with software.
Despite storage space, the system eventually runs out of disk space. If your facility plans to
preserve image data, you must periodically transfer images and scan information to the
designated archive media.

Image Display
Requested images pass through the IP (image processor) on their way to the screen. The
Image Processor uses a bulk memory to store images selected for Auto View, MID, paging,
magnification, rotation, reformat or 3D (3D optional).
The images appear on the image monitor. The screen contains a display matrix of 1024 x
1024 picture elements, or 1,048,576 pixels. The 1024 display can be further divided into
viewports. The number of viewports displayed determine the number of pixels within a
viewport. Each pixel displays one of the 256 available shades of gray.
The LightSpeed Series system reconstructs axial and continuous images of 5122 pixels.
Images from other scanners may display 64, 128, 320, or 1024 pixel image matrices.
The amount of anatomy represented by each pixel equals the Display Field of View diameter
in mm divided by the matrix width/height.
The system assigns a unique CT number value, originally called a Hounsfield Unit, to each
pixel. The two dimensional pixel represents a three dimensional portion of patient tissue.
The pixel value represents the proportional amount of X-Ray beam that passed through
anatomy and entered the detector.

Gray Scale
The monitor translates the computed pixel value into a shade of gray. Your window Width
and Level choices control which range of CT values receive emphasis. The window Width
assigns the quantity of pixel values to the gray scale. The window Level determines the
center pixel value in the gray scale.

Possible range of pixel values


Width

Level

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-31


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• Window Width = selected range of pixel values


• Window Level = middle value
The system displays every pixel value that falls outside the gray scale as either black or
white. It assigns a gray value to every pixel that falls within the selected window. IF enabled,
the filmed image displays a gray scale icon along the left border of the image.
The system displays the currently selected window Width and window Level along the
bottom of the screen: W = xxxxx and L = xxxxx. To determine the pixel values currently
represented by the gray scale: Divide the window Width by 2; add and subtract this number
to/from the window Level.
Example: W=320; L= -1500; 320 P 2 = 160 
-1500 + 160 = -1340; -1500 - 160 = -1660
The gray scale represents values from -1340 to -1660
To find the best gray scale for an image, decrease the window width to 2. Increase or
decrease levels until the tissue of interest turns gray. Now increase the window width until it
includes the rest of the image.

CT Number
Nominal CT numbers range from -1024 to +3071 and extended CT numbers range from
-31743 to +31743. The LightSpeed Series is defaulted to the extended CT number range.
This system references CT number zero to water and CT number -1000 to Air.
Lung and fat have negative pixel values and normally appear black (nominal CT numbers
range). A CT number over 200 represents dense material like contrast agent, calcium, bone,
and normally appears white (nominal CT numbers range).
Inverse Video reverses video white to black, but pixel values remain the same.

CAUTION: CT Numbers are NOT absolute; misdiagnosis is possible. System and patient
variables may effect CT Number accuracy. If you rely solely upon CT numbers
without taking the following variables into consideration you could
misdiagnosis an image.
The following variables effect CT Number accuracy:
• Partial volume effects of anatomy
• Scans acquired with IV or oral contrast agents
• X-Ray tube deterioration
• Improperly calibrated system (poorly centered phantom, used wrong phantom,
replaced current calibration files with extremely old Cal files)
• Beam hardening due to patient anatomy, especially bone.

11-32 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

To reduce CT Number variations:


• Warm-up the X-Ray tube whenever the system recommends it; make sure the tube
design matches the software configuration parameters
• Center the patient anatomy of interest in the gantry opening. Select an SFOV that
encompasses the patient.
• Acquire comparable images with similar scan and reconstruction choices.
• Maintain consistent table height throughout the exam.
• Test image quality on a regular basis to provide the numerical data to track system
performance over time.
To decrease the potential for misdiagnosis:
• Use ROI to compare pathology to surrounding tissue
• Scan structures with slice thicknesses about one-half the thickness of the lesion or less.
Example: Prescribe scan thickness of 5mm or less to scan a Lesion with a 10mm thickness.
(Display an axial image and use the Measure Distance and ROI functions to determine the
size of the pathology.
Center ROI measurements over the midpoint of the pathology to minimize partial volume
effects.

Variables You Cannot Control


The mixture of tissue types, such as fat with tissue within the same voxel (a pixel with depth),
varying patient sizes, differences between CT machines and X-Ray tubes, all lead to CT
number variance. In a well calibrated scanner, water has a CT number that ranges from -3
to +3. The CT number remains uniform across all kV settings. However, as the X-Ray tube
ages, kV decreases and pixel values become less dependable.

Pixels
The anatomic image consists of rows and columns of small, square, picture elements called
pixels. The screen displays 1,048,576 pixels in a matrix of 1024 horizontal rows of 1024
pixels. Add number of viewports selected for viewing to determine the number of pixels used
for display in each viewport. The screen pixel size remains the same, but the amount of
anatomy the pixels represent varies with the scan and display field of view (SFOV & DFOV). A
pixel also represents a specific anatomic area. The system identifies each two dimensional
pixel by its location, area and value.

Pixel Coordinates
Describe pixel location two ways.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-33


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• Matrix Coordinates: Upper left pixel = (0,0);


lower right pixel = (511,511);
pixel in center of matrix = (255,255);
pixel ten columns to the right = (10,0)

axial image

NOTE: The illustration above represents a 512 x 512 matrix viewport.


• RAS: Anatomic distance from the center of the landmark slice
Target the image; decrease the DFOV diameter. Center the reconstruction on coordinates
other than the SFOV center.
Magnifying and targeting can displace the central SFOV pixel from the central pixel. Look at
the DFOV coordinates and magnification annotation to find the SFOV center, or display the
grid. The grid always appears over the pixel in the center of the DFOV Matrix (coordinate
255,255).

RAS Coordinates
These three distances in millimeters appear on the upper left of the viewport on which the
mouse cursor is on, when Continuous Report Cursor is selected.
• The pixel with the R/L and A/P coordinates closest to zero, represents the SFOV center.
The S/I coordinate always equals the table location at isocenter.

axial plane
axial image

11-34 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Coordinates transition from R to L, A to P, and S to I, to show relationships between current


location, landmark location, and isocenter.

Coordinate location falls to the patient's right of the


Right:
mid-sagittal plane (right of isocenter)
Coordinate location falls to the patient's left of the
Left:
mid-sagittal plane (left of isocenter)
Coordinate location falls above the mid-coronal plane
Anterior
(above isocenter)
Coordinate location falls below the mid-coronal plane
Posterior:
(below isocenter)
Scan location falls between the selected landmark and
Inferior:
patient's feet
Scan location falls between the selected landmark and
Superior:
patient's head

The DFOV and matrix determine pixel size.


A reconstructed pixel represents an area determined by dividing the DFOV (in mm) by the
reconstruction matrix, squared. You may magnify pixels up to eight times the reconstructed
size, or minify them to one half size. The anatomic area represented by each pixel decreases
as the magnification factor increases; anatomic area/pixel increases as the magnification
factor decreases.

Pixel Size in millimeters


DFOV in cm 512 x 512
10 0.20
15 0.29
20 0.39
22 0.43
25 0.49
30 0.59
35 0.68
40 0.78
45 0.88
50 0.98

The DFOV determines the anatomic area imaged by a single reconstruction.


• Area equals r2 (Area =3.14 x radius x radius)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-35


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• The 50cm FOV has a 25cm radius, so its area equals 1963cm2.
• The ROI or magnification factor determines the anatomic area covered by a magnified
image.
Example: A pixel represents 0.5 by 0.5mm. Magnify pixel size by 2. Each pixel now represents
0.25 by 0.25mm of anatomy.

Pixel Size equals DFOV P Matrix size

Pixel area
equals
pixel size
pixel size squared
(width)
in mm
512
Matrix

DFOV in mm

Pixels and CT Numbers


Besides anatomic location and area, each CT pixel also represents a CT number, which in
turn indicates tissue density.
• An ROI averages the values of the enclosed pixels, and displays the resulting Mean
value.
• Standard Deviation describes the difference between the minimum and maximum ROI
value.
• A large ROI provides a larger, more accurate statistical sample than a small ROI.
An image pixel represents a three dimensional volume, or voxel. It represents anatomy
with a location, an area, and a pixel (density) value. The system flattens the 1.25, 2.5, 3.75, 5,
7.5, 10mm scan thickness into a two-dimensional screen image. If a pixel represents a
variety of tissues, the system averages the contents to produce an averaged, rather than
accurate, pixel value. Uniform tissues (within the voxel) produce fairly accurate pixel values.
CT pixel shading shows relative density. Denser materials weaken X-Ray and produce
whiter pixels. (Assumes Inverse Video OFF)
MR pixel shading reflects relative physiology. Whiter pixels represent molecules that
relaxed earlier after magnetic alignment than the darker areas.

11-36 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
General Information

Reformat displays non axial planes created from contiguous pixels extracted from
multiple images. 3D locates similar pixel values within contiguous images, and generates a
mathematical model to produce images that appear three dimensional. BMD samples pixel
values to estimate bone or tissue density.
Reconstruction assigns one value to every image pixel. CT uses pixel values of -1024
to +3071 (nominal range) or -31743 to +31743 (extended range). MR uses pixel values of
+16,000. The screen pixel translates the assigned value into one of the 256 shades of gray.
Vary the gray scale window width and level to select anatomy for display. Window Width
determines the quantity of gray pixel values. Window Level selects the center Window
Width pixel value.
Example: Two windows may contain identical widths of 100 values, but display completely
different anatomy, because one has a level of -100 and the other has a level of 150

Window Width
The system uses 256 gray shades to display 4000 CT pixel values (nominal range). The
Window Width selection determines the number of CT values represented by each shade of
gray. A narrow window assigns fewer pixels to each gray level than a wide window.
Example: WW = 256 System assigns one pixel value to each gray shade WW = 2560 System
assigns ten pixel values to each gray shade.
Enlarge the window to display anatomy that includes air, tissue, and bone, and subtle
differences in the tissue vanish, because the system assigns too many pixel values to each
shade of gray.
Narrow the window, then adjust the level to display only soft tissue. Subtle differences in
tissue density appear, because the system assigns fewer pixel values to each shade of gray.
Adjust the window whenever the display anatomy changes. Large window widths display a
range of anatomic structures and densities, while narrow windows enable subtle density
discrimination within the anatomy of interest.

Window Level
The Level equals the CT number value of pixel in the center of the Window Width range. The
Level value receives the middle shade of gray. The system displays pixel values that fall
between the center and upper window level as gray to off white. It displays pixel values that
fall between the center and lower window values as gray to charcoal. When you change the
level, the window width moves up and down the CT number line. The CT values change with
Window Level, but the Window Width and number of pixels per gray level don’t change.
Inverse Video reverses display conventions. Dense or high numbers are portrayed as black
rather than white.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 11-37


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

11-38 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Chapter 12
Quality Assurance

In order to assure consistent image quality over the system's lifetime, establish and
maintain a regular Quality Assurance (QA) program.
Constancy testing of the system should be performed in accordance with IEC 61223-2-6
or per your facility's specific QA program.
Scan a known material (usually a phantom) under a prescribed set of conditions.
• Compare the results to previous or optimum values.
• Repeat these tests on a regular basis to detect changes in image quality values before
the problem becomes visible.
– If you notice a degradation in image quality, or a change in QA values, you can
schedule a site visit and let the service person or imaging physicist run more detailed
tests.
– Early intervention could prevent a major breakdown.
Quality Assurance begins with baseline performance data acquired during system
installation, or after the repair or replacement of an X-Ray tube, collimator, detector, DAS, or
PDU circuitry.
• Compare subsequent QA results against the baseline.
• You can save baseline images for a visual comparison with your daily QA checks, but the
measurement values provide a more objective way to monitor quality.
NOTE: Copy the QA Data Form found at the end of this section. Use the form to record
baseline data and subsequent QA data.

QA Phantom (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (d)(1))


Use the Quality Assurance Phantom to assess system performance and establish an
ongoing Quality Assurance program.
The phantom design provides maximum performance information with minimum effort.
This phantom measures six aspects of image quality.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• Contrast Scale
• High Contrast Spatial Resolution
• Low Contrast Detectability
• Noise and Uniformity
• Slice Thickness
• Laser Light Accuracy
The QA phantom contains three sections, each corresponding to a single scan plane.
• Section 1: Resolution block S0mm scan location
• Section 2: Contrast membrane S40mm scan location
• Section 3: Water bath S60mm scan location
The following illustration contains a list of the sections and corresponding tests.

12-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Figure 12-1 QA Phantom


Section 1

High contrast resolution


Contrast scale
Slice thickness
Laser accuracy

Location: S0mm

Section 2

Low contrast detectability

Location: S40mm

Section 3

Noise and Uniformity

Location: S60mm

QA Schedule (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (d)(2))


Each facility determines QA and phantom calibration schedule.
GE recommends that you acquire scans of Sections 1, 2 and 3 of the QA Phantom each day.
Create a Scan Protocol file for these QA scans.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 12-2 QA Phantom Alignment


2

4
5

Table 12-1 QA Phantom Alignment

Number Description
1 Circumferential Reference Line
2 Vertical Reference Line
3 Horizontal Reference Line
4 Horizontal Reference Line
5 Phantom Bracket
6 Phantom Holder
NOTE: Reference Lines are etched into the plastic and are unpainted.

Handling the QA Phantom


Adhere to the following guidelines when handling or positioning the QA Phantom.
• Visually inspect the QA Phantom and Phantom Holder for damage before each use. If
damaged, do not use the broken piece. Have it replaced immediately.
• The Phantom Bracket on the QA Phantom, used to support it on the Phantom Holder, is
not a handle. It should not be used to hold or carry the phantom. While transporting the
QA Phantom, carry it securely with both hands to avoid dropping it. A damaged QA
Phantom can potentially cause injury.
• The Phantom Bracket is meant to have a snug fit on the Phantom Holder. This minimizes
motion during scanning, which could lead to false failures in the QA images. The snug fit
requires the user to take care when positioning or removing the QA Phantom from the
Phantom Holder.

12-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

• When positioning or removing the QA Phantom from the Phantom Holder, the patient
cradle should be moved out of the gantry fully (home position) and lowered enough so
the user can lift it straight up and off the holder. If the table is not moved to this position,
and the user reaches into the bore to adjust the QA Phantom, stress can cause the
bracket to break.
• If the QA Phantom is broken, cracked or leaking, it should be discarded immediately and
replaced with a new QA Phantom. Care should be taken to avoid any sharp edges which
may develop on the broken pieces, which can potentially cause injury. If the QA
Phantom is leaking water onto the floor, there is a potential slip and fall hazard. If the QA
Phantom is leaking while on or near the scanner, it is possible for water to get under the
table or gantry covers and cause damage.

System Performance (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (d)(2))


Maintain Image Quality
Many factors affect Image Quality:
• Proper alignment of X-Ray tube, DAS, detector, and table
• KV and mA adjustments within specifications
• Current Calibration files
• Tube Warmup every time the system recommends it
• Daily Fastcals
• Appropriate pixel size, slice thickness, reconstruction algorithm, and special processing
selections during Scan Rx
• Patient remains motionless during scan acquisition
At least three people must cooperate to produce optimum images:
• Service representative aligns the system and adjusts kV and mA
• Operator follows facility guidelines to maintain daily image quality, prescribe the exams,
and update the calibration files
• Patient follows operator (and autovoice) instructions during exam
A QA program helps locate the source of image quality problems:
• Replaces patient with phantom
• Provides standard Scan Rx parameters
• Provides System Performance tests and comparisons

Position the QA Phantom


Place the QA phantom on the phantom holder, and level it.
Turn the knob facing the cradle CW to tilt the top of the phantom AWAY from the gantry.
Use the laser alignment lights to position the phantom:

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

1. Align the axial light to the circumferential line marking Section 1.


2. Align the coronal light to the horizontal lines on either side of the phantom.
3. Align the sagittal light (where it strikes the top of the phantom) to the vertical line on the
top of the phantom.
4. Position the phantom and select .

Prescribe the QA Series for the Resolution, Low Contrastability, and Noise and
Uniformity Tests
1. Click [New Patient] to display the Patient/Exam Parameters screen.
 Use the same ID for all related QA tests so you can store the exams together.
2. Enter any additional information in the corresponding data field(s). (Optional)
3. Exam Description: Enter up to 22 characters to describe the test. (Recommended)
4. Select a protocol from the anatomical selector to select a QA protocol. (If available)
If your facility hasn't created a QA protocol, use the following parameters to finish the QA
series prescription:
On the Helical View Edit screen select the following parameters:
Table 12-2 Parameters for QA

Interface Input
Entry Head First
Position Supine
Anatomical Reference QA
Landmark Location 0 on resolution phantom at circumferential line/cross hatch.
Scan Type Helical 0.562:1
Scan Range I0 - S60
Thickness 10
Table Speed 11.25
Recon Interval 10
Tilt 0 degrees
SFOV Small
kV 120
mA 135
Rotation Speed 1 second

12-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Interface Input
DFOV 25cm (phantom diameter:approximately 21.5cm)
Standard and Bone to test high contrast resolution.
Algorithm Standard to test low contrast detectability
Standard for pixel value noise and uniformity
Matrix 512
Contrast None
Special Processing None

Analyze the QA Images


1. Display the first QA image, which is section #1 at scan location S0.
2. Copy the QA Data Form at the end of this section.
3. Record the data from the tests that follow in the corresponding area of the form.
4. Compare the current values to previously recorded values.
 If you notice a significant change in values, check the Small SFOV calibration status.
5. Calibrate the Small SFOV if the most recent calibration date falls outside the guidelines
established by your facility.
6. Report significant changes, or values that fall outside suggested windows, to your
supervisor or imaging physicist.
7. Follow facility procedures to notify service personnel.
8. Perform the following:
a) Contrast Scale test at scan location S0 of the helical scan.
b) High Contrast Spatial Resolution test at scan location S0 of the helical scan.
c) Low Contrast Detectability test at scan location S40 of the helical scan.
d) Noise and Uniformity test at scan location S60 of the helical scan.
e) Slice Thickness test at scan location S0 of the axial slice thickness scans.
f) Alignment Light Accuracy test at scan location S0 of the Alignment Light test scan.
Contrast Scale
Section 1 of the Phantom Tests the Contrast Scale
CT assigns CT numbers, also called (HU) Hounsfield Units, to the attenuation values of X-Ray
passing through a variety of material densities.
Software makes the attenuation visible by assigning shades of gray to groups of numbers
selected with the Window Width/ Level functions during image Display.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-7


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

For test purposes, the CT values of water and plexiglass in the phantom represent the
standard against which you track the system contrast scale over time.
The test for contrast scale follows:
Figure 12-3 Contrast Scale Phantom Section

Position 10mm box ROI


Position 10mm box ROI over water
over Plexiglass

1. Select Box ROI to position a 10mm box cursor on the image, as shown in Figure 12-3.
2. For consistency, use the same size cursor and location each time you perform this test.
3. Select Grid to provide a reference.
4. Select Box ROI to position a cursor over the Plexiglass resolution block (refer to Figure
12-3).
5. Record the mean CT number on the QA Data Form.
6. Optional: Record the Standard deviation
7. Select Box ROI to position a cursor over water (refer to Figure 12-3).
8. Record the mean CT number for water on the QA Data form.
9. Optional: Record the Standard deviation
10. Subtract the CT number of water from the CT number of Plexiglass
 Record the difference on the QA Data form.
 The difference should equal 120 ±12.

High Contrast Spatial Resolution


Section 1 (Figure 12-4) of the phantom contains six sets of bar patterns in a Plexiglass block
used to test high contrast spatial resolution.
Each pattern consists of sets of equally sized bars and spaces
Water fills the spaces and provides about 12% (120 HU) contrast.

12-8 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

The resolution block contains the following bar sizes:1.6mm, 1.3mm, 1.0mm, 0.8mm, 0.6mm,
and 0.5mm.
1. Examine the bar patterns to determine the limiting resolution, defined as the smallest
bar pattern in which you see all five bars.
2. You should see all five 0.6mm bars in images reconstructed with the Bone algorithm
(15cm FOV).
3. Using the standard algorithm, measure the standard deviation of the pixel values in a
single or multiple bar pattern to provide a quantitative method for assessing changes in
system resolution.
4. ROI standard deviation provides a good indicator of system resolution and a sensitive
method to detect changes in system resolution.
The recommended procedure follows:
Figure 12-4 High Contrast Spatial Resolution Section

Position box cursor over largest


bar pattern, and size it until it
fits over the pattern.

Optional: repeat for 1.3mm,


1.0mm and 0.8mm patterns.

5. Select Erase to remove previous ROI data.


6. Position a box cursor over the largest (1.6mm) bar pattern, and size it to fit within the bar
pattern as shown in Figure 12-4.
7. Record the standard deviation on the QA data form.
 Standard deviation should equal 37 ± 4, if you used standard algorithm.
Optional: Repeat this procedure for the 1.3, 1.0, and 0.8mm bar patterns.
8. Record the standard deviation on the QA data form.

MTF (optional)
The Modulation Transfer Function (MTF) mathematically quantifies high contrast
resolution.
MTF measures the contrast preserved for a sine wave pattern as a function of frequency.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-9


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

An MTF curve begins at 1 for zero frequency, and decreases as frequency increases.
Example: An MTF of 1 equals total preservation of contrast
Example: An MTF of 0.5 equals 50% loss of contrast
The limiting resolution equals the frequency at which MTF falls to 0.
An MTF curve is shown in Figure 12-16.
Measure Frequency in line pairs per centimeter.
One line pair per centimeter equals one 5mm Plexiglass bar next to one water filled 5mm
space.
Optional: Consult the publication listed as Reference 1 in section for MTF measurement
instructions (Droege RT, Morin RL. “A Practical Method to Measure the MTF of CT Scanners,”
Medical Physics, Volume 9, No. 5, pp 758-760, 1982).

Low Contrast Detectability


Section 2 of the QA phantom tests low contrast detectability, defined here as the smallest
hole size visible for a given contrast level at a given dose.
This phantom section contains a doped polystyrene membrane suspended in water and
pierced by a series of holes in the following sizes: 10.0mm, 7.5mm, 5.0mm, 3.0mm, and
1.0mm.
• The difference in CT numbers between the water, and water plus plastic, equals the
contrast in Hounsfield Units (HU).
• Your first contrast measurement of the QA phantom establishes its baseline.
Subsequent measurements should fall within 0.1% of the baseline. (1HU)
• Divide the HU value by ten to obtain the contrast in percent.
• Measure the contrast between the plastic membrane and the surrounding water in the
following manner:
Figure 12-5 Low Contract Detectability Section
A.Position box ROI over polystyrene B.Position box ROI over
membrane above holes.
water above membrane.

Subtract B from A.
Count visible holes. Subtract D from C.

D.Position box ROI


C.Position box ROI over polystyrene over water below
membrane below holes. membrane.

1. Display an image of Section 2, which is at scan location S40.

12-10 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

2. Select Erase to remove previous ROI data.


3. Select a Box ROI, and adjust the size to a rectangle about 5mm high and 50mm long.
4. First, position the ROI over the polystyrene membrane, just above the holes, as shown in
Figure 12-5.
5. Record this membrane CT number in the Top CT# column.
 QA data form (Figure ) at the end of this section.
6. Select Box ROI to position a cursor over the (100%) water section above the membrane,
as shown in Figure 12-5.
7. Record this water CT number in the Top CT# column.
8. Subtract the water's CT number from the membrane's CT number.
9. Record the difference.
10. Select Erase to remove previous ROI data.
11. Select Box ROI to position the cursor over the polystyrene membrane, just below the
holes, as shown in Figure 12-5.
12. Record this membrane CT number in the Bottom CT# column.
 QA data form (Figure ) is at the end of this section.
13. Select Box ROI to position the cursor over the (100%) water section below the
membrane, as shown in Figure 12-5.
14. Record this Water CT number in the Bottom CT# column.
15. Subtract the water's CT number from the membrane's CT number.
16. Record the difference.
17. Select Erase to remove previous ROI data.
18. Adjust the Window Width to 30 and the Window Level to the CT number you recorded
for water.
19. Count and record the number of visible holes.

Noise and Uniformity (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (j))


Section 3 (Figure 12-6) of the phantom tests noise and uniformity, which is at scan location
S60.
Noise limits low contrast resolution, and masks anatomy with similar structure to
surrounding tissue.
QA phantom Section 3 provides a uniform image by which to assess image CT number noise
and uniformity.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-11


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Use the Standard algorithm to reconstruct the image.


Figure 12-6 Noise and Uniformity Section

Optional: Take a box ROI


Position 2cm box ROI over
the center of the image. at the 12 o’clock position
75mm from center box.

Optional: Take a box ROI at


the 3 o’clock position
75mm from center box.

Image noise equals the standard deviation of CT numbers within a region of interest (ROI).
Noise results from electronic, mechanical, and mathematical differences in detected X-Ray
energy, electronic outputs, and reconstruction algorithms.
Tube Warmups, up to date calibration files, and daily Fastcals minimize noise and help
provide uniform images.
Refer to Figure 12-6.
1. Select Erase to remove previous ROI data.
2. Select Box ROI to position a 2 cm box ROI over the center of the image.
3. Record the mean CT number and standard deviation on the QA Data Form.
 QA data form (Figure ) is at end of this section.
4. Optional: Select Box ROI and move the cursor to the 12 o'clock position.
5. Record the mean CT number and standard deviation on the QA Data Form.
6. Optional: Select Box ROI to move the cursor to the 3 o'clock position.
7. Record the mean CT number and standard deviation on the QA Data Form.
 If the Image is reconstructed with Standard algorithm and Small SFOV, the Mean of
Center ROI should equal 0 ± 3.
 Standard deviation of the center ROI should less or equal 3.5 (nominal 3.2)
 The uniformity difference between the center ROI and the average of the edge ROIs
should be 0 ± 3.

Slice Thickness
Section 1 of the phantom also tests slice thickness.

12-12 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Both sides of the resolution block contain a pattern of air filled holes designed to
demonstrate slice thickness (refer to Figure 12-7).
Figure 12-7 Slice Thickness Section

Air filled
holes

The resolution block contains holes drilled 1mm apart and positioned to form a line at 45
degrees to the scan plane.
Each visible hole in the image represents 1mm of beam thickness.
The software assigns less negative CT numbers to partial hole images or holes located on
the edge of the slice profile.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-13


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Prescribe the QA Series for the Slice Thickness Test - Phantom Section #1
1. Select a protocol from the anatomical selector to select a QA protocol (if available).
2. If your facility hasn't created a QA protocol, use the following parameters to finish the
QA series prescription:
3. On the Axial View Edit screen select the following parameters:
Table 12-3 QA Protocol for Slice Thickness

Interface Input
Entry Head First
Position Supine
Anatomical Reference QA
Landmark Location 0 on resolution phantom at circumferential line/cross hatch.
Scan Type Axial
Scan Range Prescribe 4 Groups
Thickness
Group Scan Range Spacing
(For 16 slices)
1 5mm/4I I7.5 - S7.5 0
2 3.75mm/4I I5.625 - S5.625 0
3 2.5mm/8I I8.75-S8.75 0
4 1.25mm/8l I4.375-S4.375 0
5 0.625mm/16I I4.688-S4.688 0
6 2.5mm/4I I3.75-S3.75 0
Tilt 0 degrees
SFOV Small
kV 120
mA 260
Rotation Speed 1 second
DFOV 25cm (phantom diameter:approximately 21.5cm)
Algorithm Standard
Matrix 512
Contrast None
Special Processing None

12-14 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Analyze the Slice Thickness in Images


To determine slice thickness, display the image at the recommended window level and
width, and count the visible holes.
 Black lines in the image represent a full millimeter of slice thickness.
 Gray lines count as fractions of a millimeter; two equally gray holes count as a single
1mm slice thickness.
 Refer to Figure 12-8.
Recommended window width: 250
Recommended window level:
• -100 for 1.25mm
• -25 for 2.5mm
• +25 for 3.75mm
• + 50 for 5.0mm
Figure 12-8 Slice Thickness Lines

Adjust the window width and level,


then count the lines, which
represent the air filled holes.

Note: The slice thickness bars are


less distinctive in helical scans.

Each black line represents one


millimeter of slice thickness. Gray
lines represent fractions of a
millimeter

You should see one line for each millimeter of scan thickness.
Figure 12-8 represents a 5mm image.

Alignment Light Accuracy (Reference 21CFR 1020.33(g)(2))


The manufacturers drilled deeper center holes on the reference to help identify them in the
image.
The center hole position corresponds precisely to the etched marker placed on the
circumference of the phantom.
When you use an accurate light, and align the phantom's circumferential etched marker to
the axial light, the resulting image should contain a symmetrical hole pattern around the
center (longer) hole in the slice thickness pattern.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-15


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Refer to Figure 12-9.


For best results, use the 2.5mm/4i slice thickness.

Prescribe the QA Series for Alignment Light Accuracy - Phantom Section #1


Select a protocol from the anatomical selector to select a QA protocol. (If available) If your
facility hasn't created a QA protocol, use the following parameters to finish the QA series
prescription:
On the Axial View Edit screen select the following parameters:
Table 12-4 Parameters for Alignment Lights Check

Interface Input
Entry Head First
Position Supine
Type EX for the external alignment light test
Anatomical Reference
Type IN for the internal alignment light test.
Landmark Location 0 on resolution phantom at circumferential line/cross hatch.
Scan Type Axial
Scan Range I3.75 - S3.75
Thickness 2.5 mm/4i
Tilt 0 degrees
SFOV Small
kV 120
mA 260
Rotation Speed 1 second
DFOV 25cm (phantom diameter:approximately 21.5cm)
Algorithm Standard
Matrix 512
Contrast None
Special Processing None

Figure 12-9 Alignment Light Section

12-16 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Center hole position corresponds to


etched line around phantom
circumference.

Align etched line on phantom


to positioning light

1. Align the phantom to the Internal light and scan it.


 The actual scan plane should equal 0 ± 2.0mm.
2. Align the phantom to the External light and scan it.
 The actual scan plane should equal 0 ± 2.0mm.
Figure 12-9 and phantom positioning instructions.
3. Align the vertical, horizontal and circumferential lines on the phantom to the
corresponding laser lines.
 Azimuth 0 laser: Center phantom left and right within the FOV
 Azimuth 90 and 270 lasers: Center phantom up and down within the FOV.
4. Scan the phantom.
5. Display the resulting phantom image.
 Refer to Figure 12-9.
6. Select Grid to check sagittal and coronal light accuracy.
 Refer to Figure 12-10.
7. Center the phantom to isocenter, ±4.0mm, along the sagittal and coronal planes.
 Refer to Figure 12-9.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-17


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 12-10 Grid Check


A125.0 Hospital name
Patient name
a centered
Ex: 100 Console1
Ser: 1 Patient ID 5mm scan
date of scan
QA S0.0
matrix size
Img: 2
mag factor
DFOV 25.0cm
STND
L
R 1
1 2
2 5
.
.5 0
0 S0.0

kV 120
mA 260
Small
5.0mm
Tilt 0.0 R0.0
P125.0
W = 250 L = –50

QA phantom “Prone” or “Supine” A0.0

Typical Results and Allowable Variations


Because the human eye determines clinical image quality, it remains subjective and difficult
to define.
GE expects the standards of allowable variation in image quality parameters to vary with
the installation and image evaluator(s).
GE encourages you to establish and follow a Quality Assurance (QA) program so you can
discover any degradation of image quality before it effects clinical images.
Over time, institutions use the QA procedure to establish a correlation between acceptable
clinical image quality and acceptable variations in the image performance indices included
in the program.
Compare your images to the set of performance images that accompanied your system.
This section contains suggested allowable variations; don't mistake them for absolutes.
Compare any parameter variation to the maximum deviation specified in the next section
called, Dose and Performance.
Make sure you used the prescribed technique, then follow your facility guidelines to inform
service when the variations reach the specified maximum deviation.
Contrast Scale
The difference in CT numbers between the Plexiglass resolution block and water should
equal 120, with a suggested allowable variation of 10%.

12-18 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

High Contrast Spatial Resolution


The standard deviation for an ROI in the 1.6mm bar pattern should equal 37 ± 4 for the
standard algorithm.

Axial Scan Slice Thickness


Slice thickness should not vary by more than ± 1mm from the expected value, when
evaluated according to instructions.
Relatively large tolerance due to size of markers in phantom.

Low Contrast Detectability


Because this test relies upon the perceptual judgment of the person counting visible and
well-defined holes, GE can't suggest an allowable variation. Rather, we suggest you choose
a single, barely visible hole and closely monitor that particular hole during subsequent
testing for degradation in this image parameter.

Noise & CT Number of Water


When you correctly image and analyze the water section of the phantom, you should see a
CT number for water of 0 ± 3 HU for the center ROI. The uniformity difference between the
Center ROI and the average of the edge ROIs should be 0 ± 3 for Small Body (0 ± 10
maximum deviation if Large Body is used).
Expect the noise in the center of the image to approximately less or equal 3.5 (nominal 3.2).
References
Droege RT, Morin RL. “A Practical Method to Measure the MTF of CT Scanners,” Medical Physics, Volume 9, No. 5,
pp 758-760, 1982.
Jacobson DR. “Quality Assurance for Computed Tomography — Correlation with System Performance,”
Application of Optical Instrumentation in Medicine XI, D. Fullerton, Editor, Proc. SPIE 419, pp 157-165, 1983.
AAPM, “Phantoms for Performance Evaluation and Quality Assurance of CT Scanners,” Report No. 1, American
Association of Physicists in Medicine, 1977.

DOSIMETRY
Dosimetry information is provided in terms of the CTDI and CTDIw dose indices. Optionally
CTDIvol and its associated DLP (dose length product) is automatically computed and
displayed on the patient Rx menu to assist in managing patient dose. This section provides a
brief description to help you better understand these dose reporting standards.

General Information
Dose is the amount of energy imparted by the X-ray beam at a given point in an exposed
material (patient tissue, phantom, air, etc. ) and is measured in units of mGy (milli Gray). (The
old unit was the Rad which equals 10 mGy.) Dose is dependent on the energy absorption
factors of the material and on the X-ray exposure. The X-ray exposure is measured in C/kg
(coulombs per kilogram) and is dependent on the technique factors used for the scan. The

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-19


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

dose is generally proportional to the exposure which increases with increasing mA, kV and
scan time. The X-ray exposure to a point occurs from both direct X-ray from the tube and
from scattered X-ray due to adjacent material exposure.
Patient biological risk is related to dose but is also highly dependent on the specific organs
exposed. The effective dose is a way to characterize patient risk. The effective dose is the
sum of the doses weighted in accordance with the specific radio-sensitivity of the particular
organs or tissues exposed. Weighting values are published in ICRP 60 (International
Committee on Radiation Protection, Publication 60). Although we can accurately describe
the X-ray exposure potential to a patient for a CT scan, we can not easily determine the
patient dose or risk in terms of effective dose. This is because each patient is anatomically
unique and the specific details of his or her anatomy along with the source exposure must
be processed using time consuming monte-carlo computer programs to predict how
radiation will be scattered and accumulated within various patient organs.
Since it is not possible to characterize the specific dose given to individual patients, the CT
dose indices are provided to help make relative comparisons. These dose index values can
be used to compare CT systems and to help select appropriate operating conditions for
scanning. However, it is important to recognize that the dose reported by these indices is
inversely proportional to phantoms size (see Figure 12-11). This means that for the same
scan technique (protocol), smaller phantoms (patients) will produce a higher absorbed dose
than larger phantoms (patients) - see “Influence of phantom diameter, kVp and scan mode
upon computed tomography dose index”, Edward L. Nickoloff, Ajoy K. Dutta, and Zheng F. Lu,
Medical Physics 30, 395 (2003). Therefore, it is critical to remember that the body scan
FOV’s uses the 32cm CTDI phantom and all pediatric and head filter uses the 16cm CTDI
phantom for dose reporting purposes (CTDIVOL display on Scan Rx Menu). Table 12-6
indicates the phantom size used for each SFOV.
Figure 12-11 Relationship between dose and phantom size for head and body filters at
120kVp. Similar curves are obtained for the 80, 100, and 140 kVps.

1 2

12-20 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Table 12-5

Number Description
1 Head Filter
2 Body Filter
3 Relative Dose
4 Phantom Diameter (cm)

Table 12-6

SFOV type CTDI phantom


Ped Head
Small 16 cm Phantom
Head
Large 32 cm Phantom

CTDIw (Reference IEC 60601-2-44 and 21 CFR 1020.33 (c))


CTDIw or weighted CTDI100 is a dose index which consists of 2/3 of the CTDI100 peripheral dose plus
1/3 of the CTDI100 central dose. The CTDI100 dose is defined as the integral of the dose profile, Da(z),
produced in a single axial scan along a line perpendicular to the imaging plane from -50 mm to +50
mm, divided by the product of the number of slices, n, and the nominal tomographic section
thickness (row detection width), T.

Mathematical Definition of CTDI100 and CTDIw

n = number detector macro rows per scan


+50mm T = row detection width
1 Da(z) = dose profile in Z axis (absorbed in air)
CTDI100 = Da(z)dz
nT
-50mm

CTDIw =(2/3)xCTDI100 peripheral + (1/3)xCTDI 100cent

CTDIw is measured using either a 16 cm (for head scanning) or a 32 cm (for body scanning) PMMA
phantom of at least 14 cm in length. The measurements are taken at the center and peripheral (see
Figure 12-12 points A and B). The doses measured at these locations within the PMMA phantom, are
quoted as the dose absorbed in air rather than PMMA (absorption in air is about 11% higher than
absorption in PMMA).

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-21


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 12-12 CTDI Dose Reference Phantom Description

1 Head phantom 16cm dia


B 2 Body phantom 32cm dia
3 Material PMMA(polymethyl methacrylate)
E A C 4 Thickness >14cm
5 A thru E pencil chamber openings
D 6A center
7 B thru E peripheral 1cm from surface

Table 12-7

Number Phantom Description


1 Head Phantom 16 cm diameter
2 Body Phantom 32 cm diameter
3 Material PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate)
4 Thickness > 14 cm thick
5 A Thru E Pencil chamber openings
6 A Center
7 B Thru E Peripheral 1 cm from surface

The dose at the four peripheral locations is very similar due to the geometry of the system
and phantom. CTDI values are reported only for peripheral location “B” as this conservatively
represents all-peripheral dose values.
CTDI100 and CTDIw dose tables and index factors are provided in the following section. To
determine the CTDI100 dose, select the appropriate standard technique dose (small or large
filters) and multiply by the factors for describing the technique used.

12-22 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

CTDI100 Typical Technique

Typical Techniques for CTDI100 and CTDIw (For 16 slice)


HEAD-axial-cine BODY-axial-cine
25cm sfov 50 cm sfov
120kv 120kv
260 mA 260 mA
1 sec scan 1 sec scan
10mm, 2i mode 10mm, 2i mode

Typical Techniques for CTDI100 and CTDIw (For 4/8slice)


HEAD-axial-cine BODY-axial-cine
25cm sfov 50 cm sfov
120kv 120kv
260 mA 260 mA
1 sec scan 1 sec scan
5mm, 4i mode 5mm, 4i mode

(Typical techniques for CTDI100 and CTDIw are the same as for CTDI stated above)

Table of CTDI100 Dose Values (mGy) at Typical Technique (For 16 slice)


Head A Head B Body A Body B
46.41 48.59 14.09 29.07

Table of CTDI100 Dose Values (mGy) at Typical Technique (For 4/8 slice)
Head A Head B Body A Body B
46.75 47.71 14.35 29.33

Table of CTDI100, CTDIw, KV, SCAN MODE, and mAs ADJUSTMENT FACTORS
KV Adjustment Factor
KV Head A Head B Body A Body B
80 0.34 0.37 0.27 0.33
100 0.63 0.65 0.57 0.61
120 1 1 1 1
140 1.37 1.36 1.44 1.36
mAs ADJUSTMENT FACTOR = Rx mA * Rx single rotation time in seconds/ 260

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-23


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CTDI100 Aperture Adjustment Factors for Large Spot (>24kW) (For 16 slice)
Acquisition Mode Head A Head B Body A Body B
16 x 1.25 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
16 x 0.625 1.24 1.24 1.25 1.24
8 x 2.50 1.01 1.00 1.00 1.03
8 x 1.25 1.26 1.27 1.26 1.25
4 x 3.75 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.09
4 x 2.50 1.15 1.15 1.16 1.18
4 x 1.25 1.53 1.54 1.54 1.57
4 x 0.625 2.08 2.11 2.14 2.14
2 x 0.625, 1 x 1.25 2.55 2.60 2.58 2.60

CTDI100 Aperture Adjustment Factors for Small Spot (<24kW) (For 16 slices)
Acquisition Mode Head A Head B Body A Body B
16 x 1.25 1.01 1.01 1.01 1.01
16 x 0.625 1.13 1.14 1.13 1.13
8 x 2.50 0.96 0.96 0.97 0.96
8 x 1.25 1.16 1.17 1.16 1.15
4 x 3.75 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.09
4 x 2.50 1.11 1.10 1.11 1.13
4 x 1.25 1.41 1.43 1.46 1.49
4 x 0.625 1.95 1.98 2.00 2.03
2 x 0.625, 1 x 1.25 1.22 1.26 1.22 1.28

CTDI100 Aperture Adjustment Factors for Large Spot (>24kW) (For 4/8 slice)
Acquisition Mode Head A Head B Body A Body B
8 x 2.5 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
8 x 1.25 1.17 1.16 1.16 1.14
4 x 5.0 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
4 x 3.75 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02

12-24 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

CTDI100 Aperture Adjustment Factors for Large Spot (>24kW) (For 4/8 slice)
Acquisition Mode Head A Head B Body A Body B
4 x 2.50 1.10 1.09 1.09 1.08
4 x 1.25 1.47 1.46 1.46 1.45
1 x 1.25 3.37 3.37 3.50 3.50

CTDI100 Aperture Adjustment Factors for Small Spot (<24kW) (For 4/8 slices)
Acquisition Mode Head A Head B Body A Body B
8 x 2.5 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.90
8 x 1.25 1.09 1.09 1.09 1.08
4 x 5.0 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.90
4 x 3.75 1.02 1.01 1.01 1.00
4 x 2.50 1.03 1.03 1.02 1.02
4 x 1.25 1.29 1.29 1.29 1.29
2 x 0.63 1.46 1.50 1.47 1.49
1 x 1.25 2.95 2.95 2.95 2.95

Example 1 - The CTDI100 body peripheral dose for a 8.75mm/sec helical scan in 0.875:1 pitch,
8x1.25 slice mode, 250mA, 1.0s gantry speed and 120kV, is determined as follows:

29.07 mGy body peripheral dose (Body B) at typical technique


from CTDI100 table
x 1.00 120kV adjustment factor from kV Adjustment Factor
Table
x 1.25 8x1.25 aperture adjustment factor for Body B at
120kV, 250mA (i.e. 120 kV * 250 mA = 30 kW >24 kW,
so it is large spot) from CTDI100 Aperture Adjustment
Factors for Large Spot Table
x 250/260 mAs adjustment factor (250mAx1s)/(260mAx1s)
= 34.94 mGy CTDI100 Body peripheral dose

Example 2 - The CTDI100 body center dose for example 1 is determined as follows:

14.09 mGy body center dose (Body A) at typical technique


from CTDI100 table
x 1.00 120kV adjustment factor from kV Adjustment
Factor Table

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-25


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

x 1.26 8x1.25 aperture adjustment factor for Body A at


120kV, 250mA (i.e. 120 kV * 250 mA = 30 kW >24
kW), so it is large spot) from CTDI100 Aperture
Adjustment Factors for Large Spot Table
x 250/260 mAs adjustment factor (250mAx1s)/(260mAx1s)
= 17.07 mGy CTDI100 Body center dose

Example 3 - The CTDIw body dose for example 1 and 2 is computed as:
CTDIw = (2/3)*34.94 + (1/3) *17.07 = 28.99 mGy

CTDIvol (Reference IEC 60601-2-44)


The volume CTDIw (CTDIvol) describes the average dose over the total volume scanned for
the selected CT conditions of operation. The system computes CTDIvol automatically. Note
that system computations may vary slightly from manual calculations due to differences in
round-off or truncation operations.The CTDIvol is defined as follows:
a) For axial scanning

N T
CTDIvol = d
CTDIw

where N is the number of slices produced in a single axial scan, T is the slice thickness (or
row detection width), and ∆d is the table travel in z-direction between consecutive scans.
b) For helical scanning

CTDIw
CTDIvol = Scan Mode Adjustment Factor (Pitch)

Reference IEC 60601-2-44.


See Scan Mode Adjustment Factors table for factor to use.
Table 12-8 Scan Mode Adjustment Factor

Scan Mode Adjustment Factor (For 16 slice)


16 Slice Scan Modes 8 Slice Scan Modes
Pitch 0.562:1 0.938:1 1.375:1 1.75:1 0.625:1 0.875:1 1.35:1 1.675:1
Factor 1.78 1.07 0.73 0.57 1.60 1.14 0.74 0.60

12-26 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Table 12-9 Helical Pitch Factor

Helical Pitch Factor Helical Pitch Factor Cardiac Helical Scan


GE Traditional Def. (IEC Definition) Mode Factor
4.4 0.275 3.64
4.8 0.30 3.33
5.2 0.325 3.08
5.6 0.35 2.86
6.0 0.375 2.67

Example 4 - The CTDIvol head dose for a 10mm 1i, 8x1.25 axial scan, at 150mA, 1.0s gantry
speed, 120kV and a 30mm table increment between consecutive scans, is determined by:

46.41 (head A),  center, peripheral dose from CTDI100 table


48.59 (head B)
x 1.00 120kV adjustment factor from kV Adjustment Factor Table
x 1.16 (head A), 1.17 (head B) 8x1.25 aperture adjustment factor for small spot (i.e. 120 kV *
150 mA = 18 kW <24 kW, so it is small spot) from CTDI100
Aperture Adjustment Factors for Small Spot Table
x 150/260 mAs adjustment factor (150mAx1s)/(260mAx1s)
=31.06mGy, 32.80mGy Center and peripheral CTDI100
= (1/3)x31.06 + (2/3) x 32.80 CTDIw
= 32.22mGy
x 1/3 Axial “pitch adjustment factor” = 10x1/30
10.74 mGy CTDIvol

Example 5 - The CTDIvol for a cardiac helical scan using the large SFOV, 16x0.625mm slice
mode, with helical pitch 6.0, 250mA, 0.5s gantry speed, and 140kV is determined as follows:

14.09 (body A), 29.07 (body Center, peripheral dose from CTDI100 Table
B)
x 1.44 (body A), 1.36 (body B) 140kV adjustment factor from Table
x 1.25 (body A), 1.24 (body B) 16x0.625 aperture adjustment factor for large spot from Table
(at 120kV, 250mA > 24 kW)
x 125/260 mAs adjustment factor (250mAx 0.5s)/(260mAx1s)
=12.19mGy, 23.57mGy Center and peripheral CTDI100
= (1/3)x12.19 + (2/3)x23.57 CTDIw
= 19.78 mGy
x 2.67 Cardiac helical “pitch factor” = 2.67 from Cardiac Helical Pitch
Factor Table

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-27


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

52.80 mGy CTDIvol

Peak Skin Dose


This section provides information on the relationship between peak CT Skin Dose and CTDI
as standardized in IEC 60601-2-44, the most commonly used dose metric used to estimate
dose to the patient. The peak skin dose is actually a point dose and is of particular interest to
assess possible deterministic skin effects, especially in applications such as CT Perfusion
and interventional procedures where the same anatomical area is irradiated for relatively
long durations of time.
As CTDI100 is measured using a 10cm long pencil ionization chamber, at fixed locations
within a perfectly symmetrical and centered cylindrical phantom, the metric is not a direct
measure of patient dose given the non-uniform patient composition and natural differences
in patient sizes relative to the fixed sizes of the CTDI phantoms. In general terms, the dose to
the skin can be calculated only by estimating the amount of dose absorbed at surface of the
object. The peripheral CTDI100 measurement is measured at the surface (1cm inside the
surface of the phantom). However, for scans performed without table movement (such as CT
Perfusion and Fluoroscopy), the integrated-CTDI100 (peripheral) can be a significant
overestimation of the peak skin dose as much as a factor of two1.
As an informative description, a basic CT Skin Dose Index (CTSD) is provided below. While this
is not the peak skin dose (a point dose) for a patient, it is a metric that can be readily
calculated based on either the CTDI100 (peripheral) value and associated kV, mA, and aperature
adjustment factors found in Chapter 12 of the Technical Reference Manual or the peak of
the dose profile given in Table 12-9 below and the following adjustment equation. This
metric helps to address the overestimation of peak skin dose by use of CTDIvol values
especially for scanning without table movement such as found in CT perfusion and
interventional procedures.
Actual peak skin dose will vary due to a variety of factors that include actual patient size and
centering in the bore.
Table 12-10 Peak of dose profile in mGy for available apertures and kV and bowtie filter
combinations for a single one-second rotation at 260 mA. The head values are from the
peripheral locations of the 16cm CTDI phantom and the body values are from the peripheral
locations of the 32cm CTDI phantom.

1.The following article provides an explanation of the relationship between CTDIvol and peak skin
dose for helical and cine-mode exams: J. A. Bauhs, T. J. Vrieze, A. N. Primak, M. R. Bruesewitz, and
C. H. McCollough, 2008, "CT dosimetry: comparison of measurement techniques and devices," Ra-
diographies Vol. 28, pp. 245-253. Available at: http://radiographics.rsna.org/content/28/
I/245.full.pdf+html.

12-28 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

SFOV / Aperture (mm)


kV
Focal Spot 20 15 10 5 1.25
Head
15.54 14.97 15.39 13.51 11.54
LargeFocal
Head
14.88 14.55 14.1 11.1 6.68
SmallFocal
80
Body
9.61 9.28 8.58 8.1 6.88
LargeFocal
Body
9.56 9.15 7.94 7.01 3.67
SmallFocal
Head
27.62 26.46 27.39 23.31 19.55
LargeFocal
Head
26.46 25.75 24.68 20.73 10.94
SmallFocal
100
Body
18.06 17.07 15.89 14.9 12.32
LargeFocal
Body
17.54 16.82 14.68 12.72 7.15
SmallFocal
Head
40.68 39.2 40.94 35.36 29.62
LargeFocal
Head
39.93 39.31 37.58 30.13 16.7
SmallFocal
120
Body
28.06 26.81 24.27 22.81 19.12
LargeFocal
Body
27.41 26.35 22.99 19.57 10.64
SmallFocal
Head
57.11 54.97 55.57 47.9 39.68
LargeFocal
Head
55.51 54.21 51.91 41.93 22.6
SmallFocal
140
Body
39.44 37.29 34.75 32.32 26.85
LargeFocal
Body
38.51 36.88 31.91 27.76 15.66
SmallFocal
Note: The values within this table have an expected variance of ± 40%.
(In the case of Segment Scanning, an expected variance would be
more than ± 40%.)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-29


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Maximum peak of dose profile (max {Dperipheral (z)}) = Peak dose from Table 12-30* (actual
scan mA/260mA) * gantry rotation speed in seconds.
Computed Tomography Skin Dose Index (CTSD) is an indicator of the peak absorbed dose in
skin tissue located within the area of coverage of the radiation field.
For Axial scanning:

peripheral

N The number of tomographic sections produced in a single axial scan


of the X-ray source.
T The nominal tomographic section thickness.
d The patient support travel in z-direction between consecutive scans.
CTDI100 (peripheral) The average of the four values of CTDI100 measured around the dosim-
etry phantom periphery.

NOTE: For axial scanning with a total table travel of less than N x T, this definition may
overestimate the dose.
NOTE: For the selected CT condition of operation, but irrespective of any scanning length
that may be used clinically, the axial-scanning CTSD is an index of dose based on a
convention of 100 mm range of integration along the z-axis. For axial scanning, CTSD
corresponds to the dose averaged over the phantom central section peripheral holes.
For Helical scanning:

peripheral

CT pitch factor
NOTE: CT pitch factor will be a function of time when d or N x T are variable during the
exposure.
NOTE: For helical scanning with a small number of rotations and a table travel per rotation
of less than N x T, this definition may overestimate the dose.
NOTE: For the selected CT condition of operation, but irrespective of any scanning length
that may be used clinically, the helical-scanning CTSD is an index of dose based on
a convention of 100 mm range of integration along the z-axis. For helical scanning,
CTSD corresponds to the dose averaged over the phantom central section peripheral
holes.
For scanning without movement of the patient support:

max{Dperipheral(z)}

n Equal to the number of rotations.

12-30 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

The maximum value of the four dose profiles measured in the


phantom periphery produced in a single axial rotation along lines z
max
{Dperipheral(z)} perpendicular to the tomographic plane, where dose is reported as
absorbed dose in air and is evaluated within a polymethyl
methacrylate (PMMA) dosimetry phantom.

NOTE: Includes situations where the patient support may be moved manually, for example,
during an interventional procedure.
For Axial and Helical scanning involving table travel in two derections (“shuttle” mode):

max{Dperipheral(z)}

n Equal to the number of rotations.


N The nominal tomographic section thickness.
R The range of table travel during the entire loading.
The maximum value of the four dose profiles measured in the phantom
periphery produced in a single axial rotation, with time weighted
max average CT conditions of operation, along lines z perpendicular to the
{Dperipheral(z)} tomographic plane, where dose is reported as absorbed dose in air and
is evaluated within a polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) dosimetry
phantom.

Deterministic effect (refer to IEC60601-2-44:2009 Clause


203.5.2.4.5)
There is the possibility that in normal use the patient can be exposed to radiation dose levels
of 1Gy CTDI100(peripheral) or above, at which the deterministic effects may occur. Management
of the high radiation dose is critical to maintain the radiation safety.
The available settings concerning the radiation dose level including mA, kV, scan time,
Aperture, SFOV etc. The below table provides the Scan Duration(seconds) required to meet
1Gy CTDI100(peripheral) at 200mA exposure at same scan location.

Scan Duration(seconds) required to meet 1Gy CTDI100(peripheral) at 200mA exposure


Aperture

kV SFOV 2×0.62
16×1.2 16×0.6 4×0.62
8×2.50 8×1.25 4×3.75 4×2.50 4×1.25 5,1×1.2
5 25 5
5
Head 71 58 72 56 66 62 46 34 27
80
Body 134 109 131 108 124 114 86 63 52

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-31


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Scan Duration(seconds) required to meet 1Gy CTDI100(peripheral) at 200mA exposure


Aperture

kV SFOV 2×0.62
16×1.2 16×0.6 4×0.62
8×2.50 8×1.25 4×3.75 4×2.50 4×1.25 5,1×1.2
5 25 5
5
Head 40 33 41 32 38 35 26 19 15
100
Body 72 59 71 58 67 62 46 34 28
Head 26 21 26 21 24 23 17 12 10
120
Body 44 36 43 35 41 37 28 20 17
Head 19 15 19 15 18 17 12 9 7
140
Body 32 26 31 26 30 27 20 15 12

Other Dosimetry Information

Dose Length Product (DLP)


The dose length product (DLP) is a simple calculation and is given in milliGray-Centimeters
(mGy-cm). The DLP is computed and displayed on Scan Rx Menu for each group prior to the
scan as well as an accumulated DLP for all scans taken up to the current time during the
exam. Note that system computations may vary slightly from manual calculations due to
differences in round-off or truncation. The final exam accumulated DLP provides a
convenient measure for maintaining patient or procedure dose management statistics. The
DLP is computed given the CTDIvol described above as follows:
DLP = CTDIvol x (total scan coverage in cm).
The total scan coverage can be determined from the Scan Rx Menu as the product of the
table speed in cm/sec and the total exposure time in seconds. For helical scanning, the total
scan coverage (length) will be longer than the image length due to the having to obtain
additional scan views at both the beginning and end of a scan in order to have sufficient
data for reconstruction of the end images. - this is known as helical over beaming.
Differences between the displayed and manually calculated DLP value may occur if the total
coverage as a function of x-ray on-off time is not used.

Dose Efficiency (Reference IEC 60601-2-44)


The dose efficiency, which is a function of focal spot size and beam collimation, is also
automatically computed and displayed on the Scan Rx Menu. The dose efficiency is a
measure of how much of the Z-axis X-ray beam is used by the system.

LightSpeed16 Slice

12-32 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Collimation Dose_Efficiency_Large_Focal_Spot % Dose_Efficiency_Small_Focal_Spot %


2x0.625 41.87 78.31
4x0.625 47.90 53.06
4x1.25 63.44 72.50
4x2.5 86.75 90.96
8x1.25 78.41 85.19
16x0.625 78.80 85.70
4x3.75 92.04 90.87
8x2.5 96.99 99.82
16x1.25 97.40 98.66

LightSpeed 4/8 Slices


Collimation Dose_Efficiency_Large_Focal_Spot % Dose_Efficiency_Small_Focal_Spot %
2x0.625 N/A 100.00
1x1.25 30.96 36.34
4x1.25 65.93 73.86
4x2.5 87.43 90.58
8x1.25 81.11 87.10
4x3.75 92.92 90.78
8x2.5 96.97 99.82
4x5 96.97 99.82

Scout Dose
Generally, because of short scan times and low mA, the scout dose will be a small part of the
total patient exam dose, additionally a standardized scout dose calculation method has yet
to be developed for CT, therefore scout dose is not currently reported by the system.

Phantoms for Performance Testing (Reference 21CFR 1020.33


(c)(3)(v))
The results of this section conform to federal regulation 21CFR 1020.33 (c).
GE used the phantoms and procedures recommended in the CDRH final draft of “Routine
Compliance Testing for Computed Tomography X-Ray Systems” (dated April 26, 1984) to
measure dose and dose profile, and calculate CTDI.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-33


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

GE used a 21.5cm water filled acrylic phantom to measure all Head performance tests.
Testers placed a 30cm wide acrylic ring around the water phantom to measure Body
performance.

Noise
Statistically measure the CT numbers represented by an array of pixels contained in a 2 x
2cm central region of interest (ROI)
Noise equals the standard deviation expressed in Hounsfield units, divided by 1000 to
represent the contrast scale between air and water, then multiplied by 100 to give a value in
percent.

Noise
1020.33 (C) (3) i

The Standard Deviation In the Center scanned with Typical Technique and Standard 512
Recon at 5mm, 4i mode.

Head Body
0.5% 1.3% 260mAs 120 kVp

GE used the Small Body SFOV, rather than the Head SFOV.
Head: Use 25cm FOV
Body: Use 35cm FOV
Both SFOVs use similar resolution algorithms except the Small Body SFOV does not use the
bone/brain interface correction, which the phantom does not need.
The Small Body and Head SFOV produce negligible image performance differences.

12-34 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Representative Images (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (d)(3)(i))


Figure 12-13 Representative Images
LightSpeed Series Axial Head (25cm FOV)

120kV, 260mA, 1sec, 5mm, 4i

LightSpeed Series Axial Body (35cm FOV)

120kV, 260mA, 1sec, 5mm, 4i

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-35


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

For digital form of representative images, can refer to the following steps to find them on
the software UI.
1. On Display Monitor, select [Service] to show the Common Service Desktop. Then, click
the [Install 21CFR Images] under [Image Quality].

2. A message will pop up to show the installation success.

3. Go to [ImageWorks] to check the images. Image information: Exam: 320/ct99, Name:


Power Noise2.

12-36 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Nominal Slice Thickness (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(3)(iii))


Table 12-11 Nominal Slice Thickness

Head (For 16 slice) Body (For 16 slice)


5.0mm, 4i mode 5.0mm, 4i mode
3.75mm, 4i mode 3.75mm, 4i mode
2.5mm, 4i mode 2.5mm, 4i mode
1.25mm, 4i mode 1.25mm, 4i mode
1.25mm, 1i mode 1.25mm, 1i mode
0.625mm, 2i mode 0.625mm, 2i mode
2.5mm, 8i mode 2.5mm, 8i mode
1.25mm, 8i mode 1.25mm, 8i mode
1.25mm, 16i mode 1.25mm, 16i mode
0.625mm, 16i mode 0.625mm, 16i mode

Sensitivity Profile (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(3)(iv))


The sensitivity profile is a graph of the slice thickness. To recreate the original graphs, scan a
0.5mm tungsten wire in air that makes a 26.6° angle with scan plane. The wire is centered at
ISO center.
Refer to profile graphs in Figure 12-14 and Figure 12-15.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-37


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 12-14 Profile Curve for Head


5.0mm, 4i mode & 2.5mm, 8i mode & 1.25mm, 16i mode
Head

Dose Profile
Slice Thickness Profile

3.75mm, 4i mode
Head

Dose Profile
Slice Thickness Profile

12-38 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Profile Curve for Head (continued)


2.5mm, 4i mode & 1.25mm, 8i mode & 0.625mm, 16i mode
Head

Dose Profile
Slice Thickness Profile

1.25mm, 1i mode & 0.625mm, 2i mode


Head

Dose Profile
Slice Thickness Profile

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-39


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 12-15 Profile Curve for Body

5.0mm, 4i mode & 2.5mm, 8i mode & 1.25mm, 16i mode


Body

Dose Profile
Slice Thickness Profile

3.75mm, 4i mode
Body

Dose Profile
Slice Thickness Profile

12-40 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Profile Curve for Body (continued)


2.5mm, 4i mode & 1.25mm, 8i mode & 0.625mm, 16i mode
Body

Dose Profile
Slice Thickness Profile

1.25mm,1i mode & 0.625mm, 2i mode


Body

Dose Profile
Slice Thickness Profile

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-41


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Table 12-12 Dose Profile in Air FWHM

For 4/8 slice system

Dose Profile Full Width at Half Maximum(FWHM in mm)


Aperture(mm) Small Focal Spot Large Focal Spot
1.25 (2x0.625) 1.90 N/A
1.25 (1x1.25) 3.51 4.25
5.00 6.96 8.03
10.00 11.65 12.69
15.00 16.34 16.83
20.00 20.01 20.73

For 16 slice system

Dose Profile Full Width at Half Maximum(FWHM in mm)


Aperture(mm) Small Focal Spot Large Focal Spot
1.25 (2x0.625) 1.90 3.46
5.00 6.96 8.03
10.00 11.65 12.69
15.00 16.34 16.83
20.00 20.01 20.73

Modulation Transfer Function (MTF) (Reference 21CFR 1020.33


(c)(3)(ii))
1020.33 (C) ii same conditions as Noise
An MTF of 100% or 1.0 indicates no signal loss.
An MTF of 0.0 indicates total signal loss.
In practice, small, high contrast objects become impossible to resolve when MTF reaches the
0.05 – 0.02 range.

12-42 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Figure 12-16 MTF Curve


head and body
1.0

0.8

0.6
mtf

0.4

0.2

0.0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
lp/cm

Maximum Deviation (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c))


In order to come up with “the maximum deviation,” manufacturers must imagine every
possible situation, however unlikely, that might occur within the entire user community.
Our statements of deviation include a maximum deviation to assure compliance with the
regulation, as well as a statement of expected deviations in the large majority of our
systems.
GE bases the expected deviations on the results of extensive multiple system testing.

Tomographic section thickness


• 0.625mmmm
• 1.25mm
• 2.5mmmm
• 3.75mmmm
• 5mmmm
• 7.5mmmm
• 10mmmm

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-43


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Typical Dose (Reference IEC 60601-2-44 and 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(2)(v))


Expected deviation equals ±15%, except for the10 mA and 1.0mm techniques where
variation may be greater (up to a factor of two) due to the inherent deviation in small values.
Maximum deviation anticipated for tube output equals ± 40%.

Dose Profile (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(2)(v))


The maximum deviation relating to dose profiles (FWHM or Full Width at Half Maximum)
should equal ±30% or 1.5mm, whichever is larger.
This value includes variability inherent in the measurement of dose profile with TLD
(thermoluminescence dosimeter) chips.
The expected deviation equals ±10% or 0.5mm, whichever is larger.

Performance (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c)(3)(v))


Noise
The noise squared (s2) in a CT image is inversely proportional to the X-Ray dose.
The maximum deviation equals 15%.
Expected deviation equals 10%.

MTF
With the protocol used to generate the data reported here, expected deviations for values
on the MTF curve: - 10%.
Maximum deviations may reach - 20%.

Sensitivity Profile
With the protocol used to generate the data reported here, the slice sensitivity profiles
(FWHM) may vary ± 10% or 0.5mm whichever is larger.
Helical Scans: The slice sensitivity profile is triangular, and the FWHM may deviate by 20%,
or 1mm, whichever is greater.
With other methods, the maximum deviation may reach 1.5mm for all thicknesses; thin
slices are most affected by these measurement errors.

Frequency of constancy tests (Reference IEC 61223-2-6 section


4.7)
The constancy tests shall be repeated as indicated for the individual test methods.
However, the frequency of each constancy test may be reduced if the system under test

12-44 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

proves to be within tolerance for a period of 6 months. In this case the dose measurement
may be repeated annually; all other tests may be done quarterly.
In addition, the constancy tests should be repeated:
• Whenever malfunction is suspected;
• Immediately after the CT scanner undergone maintenance that could affect the
performance parameter under test;
• Whenever the constancy test leads to results outside the established criteria, to confirm
the test result.

Radiation Protection
A qualified radiological health physicist should review scan room shielding requirements.
Consider equipment placement, weekly projected workloads, and materials used for
construction of walls, floors, ceiling, doors and windows.
The following illustrations depict measurable radiation levels within the scan room while
scanning a 32cm CTDI body phantom (body) and a 20cm water phantom (head).

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-45


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 12-17 Typical Scatter Survey (Body Filter)

BODY SCATTER PHANTOM


ISO-Contour Levels : 0.66, 1.31, 2.63 and 5.26 μGy/Scan

Technique:
0.66 1.31 2.63 5.26 5.26 2.63 1.31 0.66 140kV
100mA
1 Sec
4 x 5.00mm

50cm

50cm

BODY SCATTER PHANTOM


ISO-Contour Levels : 0.66, 1.31, 2.63 and 5.26 μGy/Scan

Technique:
140kV
100mA
1 Sec
4 x 5.00mm

0.66 1.31 2.63 5.26 5.26 2.63 1.31 0.66

50cm
50cm

12-46 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Figure 12-18 Typical Scatter Survey (Head Filter)

HEAD PHANTOM
ISO-Contour Levels : 0.33, 0.66, 1.31 and 2.63 μGy/Scan

0.33 0.66 1.31 2.63


Technique:
2.63 1.31 0.66 0.33 140kV
100mA
1 Sec
4 x 5.00mm

50cm
50cm

HEAD PHANTOM
ISO-Contour Levels : 0.33, 0.66, 1.31 and 2.63 μGy/Scan

Technique:
140kV
100mA
1 Sec
4 x 5.00mm

0.33 0.66 1.31 2.63 2.63 1.31 0.66 0.33

50cm

50cm

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-47


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 12-19 Scatter for Fluoro (Body)

ISO Center

Gantry

Table

Front
Rear

Horizontal

Fluoro position – Body

μGy/Hour

12-48 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Figure 12-20 Scatter for Fluoro (Head)

ISO Center

Gantry

Table

Front
Rear

Horizontal

Fluoro position – Head

μGy/Hour

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-49


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 12-21 Maximum Symmetrical Radiation Field

X-Ray Tube
Focal Spot

541 mm
(ISO Center)

23.89 mm (Z-Axis)
625.8 mm (X-Axis)

Focal Spot Position and Tolerance - “x” axis 0 +/- 1.5 mm


Focal Spot Position and Tolerance - “z” axis 0 +/- 1.5 mm

12-50 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Quality Assurance

Figure 12-22 QA Master Data Form

QA Data Form date:

Contrast Scale High Contrast Bar Size Std. Dev.


Mean CT Std. Dev Spatial Resolution
#
plastic
Spec 37+/‐4

water

difference
120+/-12

Slice Thickness #of Visible Lines Alignment Light


Accuracy Centered Y/N
INT axial

EXT axial

W/L 250/50 W/L 250/50 90/270 laser

0 laser
W/L 250/-25 W/L 250/-100

Noise and Uniformity


Low Contrast Top Bottom
detectability CT # CT # Spec: measurement:
Mean CT #
membrane (Ctr. ROI)
Std. Dev.
(Ctr. ROI) <= 3.5
water
Uniformity (nominal 3.2)
difference (Ctr. Mean-
Edge Mean)
smallest hole
W/L used (30/0)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 12-51


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

12-52 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Chapter 13
CT Acceptance Testing

NOTE: Prepare the standard as described below. Use this manual with such a standard.
This section describes the procedures for CT acceptance testing, based on IEC 61223-3-5,
and additional testing required by MHLW PAL EP6 (Japan) and JJG 1026-2007 (China).
• "(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.1)" on page 13-1
• "(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.2)" on page 13-2
• "(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.3)" on page 13-7
• "(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.4)" on page 13-14
• "(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.5)" on page 13-17
• "(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.6)" on page 13-18
• "(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Optional)" on page 13-21

Positioning of The Patient Support


(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.1)
Positional accuracy of the patient support includes both longitudinal positioning and
backlash evaluation.
The accuracy of longitudinal patient support positioning is evaluated by moving the patient
support a defined distance in one direction and confirming the distance traveled.
The accuracy of moving the patient support in one direction and moving it back to the
starting position is referred to as backlash.
The test procedure and data evaluation process are well documented in IEC 61223-3-5.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Patient Positioning Accuracy


(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.2)

Internal/external Laser Light Accuracy; Preview Tomographic Accuracy;


Sagittal and Coronal Light Accuracy Test
Test Equipment
A thin wire with a diameter of 1mm is preferred. In order to be aligned with the laser light,
the wire can be taped down on a flat surface and then placed on the cradle (see Figure
13-1).
Figure 13-1 A thin wire is taped on a flat box for patient positioning accuracy testing.

Test Procedure for Internal/external Laser Light Accuracy


1. Remove cradle pad.
2. Put the wire with the box on the cradle and use the level to position the box as horizontal
as possible in both z and x directions.
3. Align the wire with the internal laser light field and make it parallel to the scan plane,
and use coronal Laser light to center the wire in the up/down direction.
4. Landmark the wire using internal landmark.
5. Scan the wire using the scan protocol as listed in Table 13-1.

13-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

6. For the external laser light accuracy, move the cradle out and align the wire with the
external laser light field, and use coronal laser light to center the wire in the up/down
direction.
7. Landmark the wire using external landmark.
8. Scan the wire using the protocol as listed in Table 13-1.
Table 13-1 Scan protocols for axial internal/external light accuracy

For 16 Slice
Aperture/
Scan
Scan Slice Scan Range and Recon DFOV
kV mA speed SFOV
mode thickness Orientation kernel (cm)
(s)
(mm)
Internal 10mm/ I4.5 to S4.875
Axial 120 260 1 small Bone 10
Light 16i x 0.625 head first
External 10mm/ I4.5 to S4.875
Axial 120 260 1 small Bone 10
Light 16i x 0.625 head first

For 4/8 Slices


Aperture/
Scan
Scan Slice Scan Range and Recon DFOV
kV mA speed SFOV
mode thickness Orientation kernel (cm)
(s)
(mm)
Internal 1.25mm/ I3.435 to S3.440
Axial 120 160 1 small Bone 10
Light 2i x 0.625 head first
External 1.25mm/ I3.435 to S3.440
Axial 120 160 1 small Bone 10
Light 2i x 0.625 head first

Test Procedure for Preview Tomographic Accuracy


1. Take a scout scan as listed in Table 13-2.
2. Scan the wire using the Helical protocol as listed in Table 13-2.
Table 13-2 Scan protocols for Preview Tomographic accuracy

For 16 Slice
Scan Aperture/
Scan Scan Range and Recon DFOV
kV mA speed SFOV Slice thickness
mode Orientation kernel (cm)
(s) (mm)
S30 to I30 head
Preview Scout 120 50 NA NA NA NA NA
first

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

1.25mm0.625
Helic I3.0 to S3.0 head
Tomo 120 200 1 small pitchInterval Bone 10
al first
0.2mm

For 4/8 Slices


Scan Aperture/
Scan Scan Range and Recon DFOV
kV mA speed SFOV Slice thickness
mode Orientation kernel (cm)
(s) (mm)
S30 to I30
Preview Scout 120 50 NA NA NA NA NA
head first
1.25mm/
0.625mm/
Helic I3.0 to S3.0
Tomo 120 160 1 small 1:1pitch/ Bone 10
al head first
Interval
0.2mm

Test Procedure for Sagittal and Coronal Light Accuracy


1. Remove the cradle pad.
2. Put the wire with the box flat on the cradle and use the level to position the box as
horizontal as possible in both z and x direction.
3. Position the wire along the iso center using both sagittal (left/right) and coronal
(up/down) laser light, and for this test, the wire should be perpendicular to the scan
plane.
4. Landmark the wire using internal landmark.
5. Scan the wire using the protocol as listed in Table 13-3.
Table 13-3 Scan protocol for sagittal/coronal light accuracy

For 16 Slice
Scan
Scan Aperture/ Slice Scan Range and Recon DFOV
kV mA speed SFOV
mode thickness (mm) Orientation kernel (cm)
(s)
I4.5 to S4.875
Axial 120 260 1 small 10/16i x 0.625 Bone 10
head first

For 4/8 Slices


Scan
Scan Aperture/ Slice Scan Range and Recon DFOV
kV mA speed SFOV
mode thickness (mm) Orientation kernel (cm)
(s)

13-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

I3.435 to S3.440
Axial 120 160 1 small 1.25/2i x 0.625 Bone 10
head first

Data Evaluation
1. Select the image with the maximum wire CT number for evaluation. (See Figure 13-2).
For internal laser light, confirm that the wire is in the image with image location
between I2 and S2. Record the image location in Table 13-4.
2. For external laser light, follow the similar procedure as in step 1 and record the image
location in Table 13-4.
3. For preview, follow the similar procedure as in step 1 and confirm that the wire location
in the preview image is same as axial image location. Record the distance between
preview location and axial location in Table 13-4.
4. For sagittal laser light, select the image in the middle row (image #8, for example), adjust
the window width and window level, so that the wire is round and clear in the image (for
example, ww =1500, wl =0). Then, place the cursor at the center of the wire. Record the
Left/Right coordinate value in Table 13-4. See Figure 13-3 for details.
5. For coronal laser light accuracy, record the A/P coordinate value in Table 13-4.
6. The specifications for both internal and external light accuracy are +/- 2mm (I2 - S2).
Preview accuracy is +/- 2mm. Sagittal light accuracy is +/- 3mm. (L3 - R3) Coronal light
accuracy is +/- 3mm (A3 - P3).
Table 13-4 Patient Positioning Accuracy Results and Specifications

Axial Internal Axial External


Preview Sagittal Light Coronal Light
Light Light
Measured
± 3mm or ± 3mm or
Specifications ±2mm or I2- S2 ± 2mm or I2-S2 ± 2mm
L3-R3 A3-P3
Pass/fail

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 13-2 Internal and External Light Accuracy Image. Left image with maximum wire CT
number is used for evaluation and the image location with the brightest wire is I0.31.

Image Location

Brightest Wire

13-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Figure 13-3 The sagittal and coronal light accuracy. Cursor coordinates are the values next
to “R or L” and “A or P”.

Cursor Coordinates

Cursor

Tomographic Section Thickness


(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.3)

Tomographic Section Thickness for Axial Scan


Test Equipment
Per IEC 61223-3-5, any test device containing one or preferably two ramps with known
angles to the scan plane and with a linear attenuation coefficients of not less than that of
aluminum and suitable for measuring all available tomographic section thickness should be
used.
GE Performance Phantom has a pair of tungsten wires with a slope of 1:2 (27 degree) vs. the
scan plane in both top and bottom of an acrylic block insert, but at opposite direction. (See
Figure 13-4 for the top wire.)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-7


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 13-4 View from the top of a GE Performance phantom with tungsten wire at 27
degree vs. the scan plane.

Tungsten wire at
27 degree
vs. scan plane
Scan plane

Z‐Axis

View from the top of


a GE Performance
phantom

The thin tungsten wire has a diameter of 0.05mm, and linear attenuation much higher than
that of aluminum. With a slope of 1:2, the magnification at the scan plane is by 2x, therefore,
a slice thickness of 0.625mm (FWHM) in z will be projected to a length of 1.25mm (FWHM) in
the scan plane.
Catphan 600 is commercially available and has a module CTP404, which has two pairs of
wire ramps with angle of 23 degreevs. the scan plane (see Figure 13-5). For catphan 600, the
magnification factor in the imaging plane is 1/tan(23 degree)= 2.35, slightly greater than the
wire in GE performance phantom.
Testing can be done with either the GE Performance Phantom or the Catphan 600.

13-8 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Figure 13-5 Catphan 600 module CTP404 has two pairs of wire ramps, one pair parallel vs.
x-axis, the other parallel vs. y-axis. Ramp angle at 23 degree, equal to a slope of 1:2.35.

Test Procedure
1. Center GE Performance phantom at the mark. If Catphan 600 is used, center it at
module CTP404.
2. Scan the phantom using the scan protocols as listed in Table 13-5. This table provides
the protocols for all the apertures available from the system. To evaluate specific
aperture, please select related protocol (s) from Table 13-5. Images with other slice
thickness can be retrospectively reconstructed.
3. Table 13-6 lists all the slice thickness combinations for each aperture. “N/A” means this
slice thickness is not available for the aperture.
4. Due to limited z-axis width of both phantom inserts, only center few rows are useful for
the slice thickness analysis when the phantom is centered in the middle of insert along
z-axis, especially when the aperture is wide (for example, 20mm). To study the slice
thickness for outer images, the phantom may be offset in z-axis by 10mm.
5. To study the slice thickness for the outer images at the tableside (A-side), move the
phantom and center it at S10. To study the slice thickness of the outer images at the
gantry side (B-side), move the phantom to I10.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-9


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Table 13-5 Scan protocols for measuring slice thickness

Aperture
Scan
Scan Scan Range, /slice Recon DFOV
kV mA speed SFOV
mode orientation thickness kernel (cm)
(s)
(mm)
I5 to S5
Axial 120 260 1 Small 20 /10 bone 15
headfirst
I7.5 to S7.5
Axial 120 260 1 Small 20 /5 bone 15
head first
I8.5 to S9
Axial 120 260 1 Small 20 /2.5 bone 15
headfirst
I9.5 to
Axial* 120 260 1 Small 20 /1.25 bone 15
S9.25headfirst
I4 to S3.5
Axial 120 260 1 Small 15 /7.5 bone 15
headfirst
I5.5 to S5.75
Axial 120 260 1 Small 15 /3.75 bone 15
head first
S0 to S0
Axial 120 260 1 Small 10/10 bone 15
headfirst
I2.5 to S2.5
Axial 120 260 1 Small 10/5 bone 15
head first
I4 to S3.5
Axial 120 260 1 Small 10/2.5 bone 15
headfirst
I4.5 to S4.25
Axial 120 260 1 Small 10/1.25 bone 15
head first
I4.875 to S4.5
Axial * 120 260 1 Small 10/0.625 bone 15
head first
S0 to S0
Axial 120 260 1 Small 5/5 bone 15
headfirst
I1.5 to S1.0
Axial * 120 260 1 Small 5/2.5 bone 15
head first
I2.5 to S2.5
Axial * 120 260 1 Small 5/1.25 bone 15
head first
S0 to S0
Axial 120 260 1 Small 1.25/1.25 bone 15
headfirst
I0.325 to S0.3
Axial 120 260 1 Small 1.25/0.625 bone 15
head first
NOTE: *16x0.625mm and 16x1.25 only available for LightSpeed16;
4x1.25mm and 2x2.5mm are only available for retrospective reconstruction on
LightSpeed16.

13-10 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Data Evaluation
The tomographic section thickness of an axial scan is evaluated by measuring the width of
the wire ramp along x-axis direction and then multiply the measured in-plane width by the
tangent of the ramp angle (vs. the scan plane.) For GE Performance phantom, the tangent of
the ramp angle is 0.5; for Catphan 600, it is 0.42.
1. Use proper size ROI (ROI should be placed within the wire to get accurate CT number) to
measure the CT number of both wire and background.
2. Adjust the window width to 1, and the window level to average of the CT number of the
wire and the background.
3. In window width and level adjusted, measure the width of both top and bottom wire.
4. Take average of the two widths, and multiply the average by 0.5 for GE Performance
phantom, and 0.42 for Catphan 600.
5. For a step-by-step example, see the next section.
6. The deviation of measured slice thickness is specified in Table 13-6.

CAUTION: The limiting measurement resolution of the cursor is 1mm, i.e., the distance
less than 1mm but greater than 0.5mm is rounded to 1mm, therefore, the
accuracy of this testing is limited by the cursor measurement capability. This
is especially important for thin slice measurement where the FWHM is close
to 0.625mm. The results for these thin slice images will be not as accurate as
the thick slice ones. This is the limitation by this testing method.
Table 13-6 Deviation for the slice thickness @ each aperture

Aperture Slice thickness (mm)


(mm) 0.625 1.25 2.5 3.75 5.0 7.5 10.0
1.25 ±
20 N/A 2.5±1.0 N/A 5.0±1.0 N/A 10.0±1.0
0.625*
15 N/A N/A N/A 3.75±1.0 N/A 7.5±1.0 N/A
0.625± 1.25 ±
10 2.5±1.0 N/A 5.0±1.0 N/A 10.0±1.0
0.5* 0.625
1.25± 2.5±1.0*
5 N/A N/A 5.0±1.0 N/A N/A
0.625** *
0.625± 1.25 ±
1.25 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0.5 0.625
NOTE: *16x0.625mm and 16x1.25mm only available for LightSpeed16.
** 4x1.25mm and 2x2.5mm are only available for retrospective reconstruction on
LightSpeed16.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-11


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

A Step-by-step Example for Slice Thickness Measurement Using GE Performance


Phantom
1. Scan the GE Performance phantom using 2.5mm slice mode protocol as listed in Table
13-5 and reconstruct the images at 2.5mm slice thickness.
2. In Figure 13-6, place a narrow rectangular ROI (make sure it is entirely within the wire) to
measure the CT number of the wire. Place a similar ROI in the background. In this
example, ROI 1 is placed at the background, and ROI 2 is inside the wire. The CT number
for ROI 1 =-0.63HU, ROI 2 = 227.17HU. Take the average ~114HU.
3. Set the window width to 1, and window level to 114HU. See the image in Figure 13-7
with new window width and window level.
4. The width of both wires is measured in Figure 13-8. In this case, the length of top wire is
measured at 4mm, and the bottom is measured at 4mm. The average of two widths is
4mm.
5. Multiply the average by 0.5 for the GE Performance phantom, 4mm * 0.5 =2mm
6. Therefore, the measured slice thickness (FWHM) is 2mm. According to Table 13-6, the
expected slice thickness for this slice mode is 2.5mm+/-1mm.
Figure 13-6 Place two ROIs to measure the CT number of wire and background.

13-12 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Figure 13-7 To measure FWHM from the image, set WW =1, and WL =114. .

Figure 13-8 Measured the width of both top and bottom wires: 4mm, 4mm.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-13


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Tomographic Section Thickness for Helical Scan


Per IEC 61223-3-5, the slice thickness for helical scan is optional. However, if the testing is
desired, refer to Annex G of IEC 61223-3-5 for detailed testing device and procedures.

Dose
(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.4)
For details in dosimetry, refer to Chapter 12 of the Technical Reference Manual, “Quality
Assurance”-> “Dosimetry”.
The dose measurement methodology in the Technical Reference Manual follows those
described in IEC 60601-2-44.
In this section, the protocols are proposed for CTDIw, CTDIfree air per IEC 61223-3-5, Clause
5.4 under head and body scan conditions. The specifications for CTDIw and CTDIfree air under
these proposed CT operating conditions are listed.

Scan Protocols and Dose Specifications for CTDIw


Table 13-7 describes the scan protocols for CTDIw under head and body conditions.
Table 13-8 is the expected CTDIw value and maximum deviation allowed, due to variations in
tube output, phantom setup, dosimeter centering and calibration errors.
Table 13-7 CTDIw scan protocols for Head and body conditions

Apertur
Scan Scan
Scan CTDI Scan e/Slicet Recon DFOV
kV mA speed RangeOrienta SFOV
conditions phantom mode hicknes kernel (cm)
(s) tion
s (mm)
16cm CTDI I5 to S5 head 20mm/
Head Axial 120 260 1 Head stnd 25
phantom first 2ix10
32cm CTDI I5 to S5 head 20mm/
Body Axial 120 260 1 Large stnd 50
phantom first 2ix10

Table 13-8 Expected Head and Body CTDIw and Maximum Variation using scan protocols
defined in Table 13-7

For 16 Slice
CTDIw expressed in mGy: CTDIw expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
Head 47.8mGy+/-40% Head 18.4mGy+/-40%/100mAs
Body 24.2mGy+/-40% Body 9.3mGy+/-40%/100mAs

13-14 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

For 4/8 Slices


CTDIw expressed in mGy: CTDIw expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
Head 47.4mGy+/-40% Head 18.2mGy+/-40%/100mAs
Body 24.3mGy+/-40% Body 9.4mGy+/-40%/100mAs

Scan Protocols and Dose Specifications for CTDIfree air


Table 13-9 and Table 13-10 describe the scan protocols for CTDIfree air under head and body
conditions for 4/8 slices and 16 slices.
Table 13-11 and Table 13-12 are the expected CTDIfree air value and maximum deviation
allowed due to the variations in tube output, dosimeter centering and calibration errors for
4/8 slices and 16 slices.
Table 13-9 Scan Protocols for CTDIfree air for 4/8 slices

Scanning Scan kV mA Scan Scan Range SFOV Aperture Recon DFOV


Conditions mode speed(s) (mm) kernel (cm)
Head Axial 120 260 1 S7.5 to I7.5 Head 20mm/4i stnd 25
head first x5

Body Axial 80 260 1 S7.5 to I7.5 Large 20mm/4i stnd 50


head first x5

Body Axial 100 260 1 S7.5 to I7.5 Large 20mm/4i stnd 50


head first x5

Body Axial 120 260 1 S7.5 to I7.5 Large 20mm/4i stnd 50


head first x5

Body Axial 140 260 1 S7.5 to I7.5 Large 20mm/4i stnd 50


head first x5

Body Axial 120 260 1 I5.5 to Large 15mm/4i stnd 50


S5.75 x3/75
head first
Body Axial 120 260 1 I4.5 to Large 10mm/8i stnd 50
S4.25 x1.25
head first
Body Axial 120 260 1 I4 to S3.5 Large 10mm/4i stnd 50
head first x2.5

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-15


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Body Axial 120 260 1 I2 to Large 5mm/4ix stnd 50


S1.75 1.25
head first
Body Axial 120 260 1 S0 to S0 Large 1.25/1ix1. stnd 50
head first 25
Table 13-10 Scan Protocols for CTDIfree air for 16 slices

Scan
Scanning Scan Recon DFOV
kV mA speed Scan Range SFOV Aperture(mm)
Conditions mode kernel (cm)
(s)
I5 to S5
Head Axial 120 260 1 Head 20mm/2ix10 stnd 25
head first
I5 to S5
Body Axial 80 260 1 Large 20mm/2ix10 stnd 50
head first
I5 to S5
Body Axial 100 260 1 Large 20mm/2ix10 stnd 50
head first
I5 to S5
Body Axial 120 260 1 Large 20mm/2ix10 stnd 50
head first
I5 to S5
Body Axial 140 260 1 Large 20mm/2ix10 stnd 50
head first
I 2.5 to S2.5
Body Axial 120 260 1 Large 10mm/2ix5 stnd 50
head first
I4.40 to
Body Axial 120 260 1 S4.35 Large 10mm/8ix1.25 stnd 50
headfirst
I4.7 to
10mm/16ix0.6
Body Axial 120 260 1 S4.675 Large stnd 50
25
head first
I0.325 to
1.25mm/2ix0.6
Body Axial 120 260 1 S0.3 Large stnd 50
25
headfirst
S0 to S0 1.25mm
Body Axial 120 260 1 Large stnd 50
head first /1ix1.25
I5.6 to
Body Axial 120 260 1 S5.65 Large 15mm /4ix3.75 stnd 50
headfirst

Table 13-11 Expected CTDIfree air for scan conditions under Table 13-9, for 4/8 slices

Scanning Scan kV mA SFOV Aperture (mm) Expected CTDI free


Condition mode air and maximum
deviations
Head Axial 120 260 Head 20mm/4ix5 76.8mGy +/-40%
Body Axial 80 260 Large 20mm/4ix5 22.6mGy +/-40%

13-16 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Body Axial 100 260 Large 20mm/4ix5 42.2mGy +/-40%


Body Axial 120 260 Large 20mm/4ix5 64.3mGy +/-40%
Body Axial 140 260 Large 20mm/4ix5 88.7mGy +/-40%
Body Axial 120 260 Large 15mm/4ix3/75 68.7mGy +/-40%
Body Axial 120 260 Large 10mm/8ix1.25 80.5mGy +/-40%
Body Axial 120 260 Large 10mm/4ix2.5 80.5mGy +/-40%
Body Axial 120 260 Large 5mm/4ix1.25 100.7mGy +/-40%
Body Axial 120 260 Large 1.25/1ix1.25 184.8mGy +/-40%
Table 13-12 Expected CTDIfree air for scan conditions under Table 13-10, for 16 slices

Expected CTDIfree air


Scanning Scan
kV mA SFOV Aperture(mm) and maximum
Condition mode
deviations
Head
Axial 120 260 Head 20mm/2ix10 76.3 mGy+/- 40%

Body
Axial 80 260 Large 20mm/2ix10 22.4 mGy+/- 40%

Body
Axial 100 260 Large 20mm/2ix10 41.9 mGy+/- 40%

Body
Axial 120 260 Large 20mm/2ix10 63.9 mGy+/- 40%

Body
Axial 140 260 Large 20mm/2ix10 88.1 mGy+/- 40%

Body
Axial 120 260 Large 10mm/2ix5 79.9 mGy+/- 40%

Body
Axial 120 260 Large 10mm/8ix1.25 79.9 mGy+/- 40%

Body 10mm/16ix0.6
Axial 120 260 Large 79.9 mGy+/- 40%
25
Body 1.25mm/2ix0.6
Axial 120 260 Large 155.8 mGy+/- 40%
25
Body 1.25mm
Axial 120 260 Large 155.8 mGy+/- 40%
/1ix1.25
Body
Axial 120 260 Large 15mm /4ix3.75 68.2 mGy+/- 40%

Noise, Mean CT Number and Uniformity


(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.5)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-17


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Test Equipment
For head scanning, an outsider diameter of 20cm cylindrical water phantom, such as GE
Quality Assurance (QA) phantom should be used for noise, CT number and uniformity
measurement.
For body scanning, an outsider diameter of 30cm cylindrical water phantom should be used.

Test Procedure
The detail test procedures and data evaluation for noise, mean CT number and uniformity
measurements are well described in IEC 61223-3-5 Sections 5.5.3 and 5.5.4.

Expected Results and Variations for Noise, Mean CT number and


Uniformity
Table 13-13 describes the scanning protocols for head condition using 20cm GE Quality
Assurance (QA) phantom and body condition using 30cm water phantom.
Table 13-14 describes the expected results and variations based on scanning conditions in
Table 13-13.
Table 13-13 Scan Protocols for Head and Body Scanning Conditions

Aperture/
Scanning Scan
Scan slice Recon DFOV
condition kV mA speed Scan range SFOV
mode thick-ness kernel (cm)
s (s)
(mm)

I5 to S5
Head Axial 120 260 1 Head 20/2ix10 stnd 25
head first

I5 to S5
Body Axial 120 260 1 Large 20/2ix10 stnd 35
head first

Table 13-14 Expected results for head and body scanning conditions in Table 13-13

Noise Mean CT number Uniformity


Head, QA phantom 0.35% 0+/- 3HU +/- 3HU
Body, 30cm water
1.035% 0+/- 6HU +/- 8HU
phantom

Spatial Resolution
(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Clause 5.6)

13-18 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Test Equipment
GE Performance phantom has a 0.05mm diameter tungsten wire perpendicular to the
imaging plane. This phantom can be used to evaluate the system Modulation Transfer
Function (MTF) combined with an automated software tool implemented in the GE system.

Test Procedure and Data Evaluation


1. Center the GE performance phantom along the mark.
2. Scan the phantom using the scan protocols as listed in Table 13-15.
3. Due to limited width of the tungsten wire for GE performance phantom in z-axis, select
the center two images for MTF analysis.
4. GE provides an automated tool for the MTF analysis. Use automatic MTF evaluation tool
(ImageAnalysis2) from the system to find the MTF results.
• From “Service” desktop -> “Image Quality” tab ->”Image Analysis” button ->
ImageAnalysis2->”Manual” button-> “MTF_50_10”
• Select the center two images from the ImageWorks browser .
• Click “Accept” button to calculate the mean MTF50 and MTF10 values. See Figure 13-9.
• If ImageAnalysis2 doesn’t analyze the proper wire image (GE Performance phantom has
several wires), move the outer rectangular ROI to the area where the wire is located, and
click “Accept Modification” button. MTF values for the wire will be re-calculated. See
Figure 13-9..
5. The ImageAnalysis2 displays the MTF50 and MTF10 values for each individual image
and also the average of these values. See Figure 13-9..
Table 13-15 Scan protocols for spatial resolution evaluation for head and body conditions.
“stnd” recon kernel is used for normal resolution, and “edge” kernel is high res kernel.

Scan Slice
Scan Scan range Recon DFOV
kV mA speed SFOV thickness
mode /Orientation kernel (cm)
(s) (mm)
I5 to S5 Head
Axial 120 200 1 Small 2ix10 stnd 25
First
I5 to S5 Head
Axial 120 200 1 Small 2ix10 edge 10
First
I5 to S5 Head
Axial 120 200 1 Large 2ix10 stnd 25
First
I5 to S5 Head
Axial 120 200 1 Large 2ix10 edge 10
First

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-19


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 13-9 ImageAnalysis2 for MTF analysis using wire images from GE Performance
phantom (top) and the MTF results for the images selected from ImageWorks browser.

Move the large ROI to


re-calculate the MTF

Individual MTF 10s


and Average MTF 10

Expected Results and Tolerance


Expected MTF50 and MTF10 values are listed in Table 13-16 for the scan conditions from
Table 13-15.
Table 13-16 Expected MTF50 and MTF10 values

Scan mode Recon 50% MTF (lp/cm) 10% MTF (lp/cm)


Standard 4.0 +/-20% 6.5 +/-20%
Small
Edge 8.5 -20% 13.0 -20%
Standard 4.0 +/-20% 6.5 +/-20%
Large
Edge 8.5 -20% 13.0 -20%

13-20 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Low Contrast Resolution (or low contrast detectability (LCD))


(Reference IEC 61223-3-5 Optional)
Low contrast resolution is optional for IEC 61223-3-5, but required by other regulatory
bodies, such as MHLW and SFDA, as part of the acceptance test.

Test Equipment
Catphan 600 is a commercially available CT phantom. Its solid image uniformity module
CTP486 can be used to evaluate the low contrast resolution (LCD) in a statistical manner (see
Figure 13-10). Module CTP515 can be used to evaluate visual low contrast resolution.
However, the visual low contrast resolution is highly subjective and requires observer’s study
based on a large population to get accurate results, therefore, in this section, a statistical
method is used.
The alternative to Catphan 600 for the statistical low contrast resolution measurement is the
GE Quality Assurance (QA) phantom. The uniform water section of the phantom can be used
to measure the statistical Low Contrast Detectability (or LCD).
Figure 13-10 Module CTP486 is used for Low Contrast Detectability (statistical) evaluation.

Test Procedure and Data Evaluation Using Catphan 600


1. Center Catphan 600 at the module CTP486.
2. Scan the phantom using the protocols as listed in Table 13-17.
3. Due to limited width along z-axis for the module CTP486, use 2 images for analysis.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-21


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

4. GE scanner has an automated tool to calculate statistical LCD values. . From “Service”
desktop -> click ”Image Quality” tab ->click ”Image Analysis” button ->in
”ImageAnalysis2” ->”Manual” button-> ”LCD”. (See Figure 13-11). Select the center two
image(s) from the ImageWorks browser. Click “Accept” button. In the LCD popup window
“Input hole diameter (mm)”. Click the “OK” button to use the default value of 3.00 for the
object size (=3mm).
– A result panel will show the calculated LCD values for each individual image and the
average from all images as shown in Figure 13-11. The individual results are listed
under column “ % Contrast @95% CL”. The average LCD result is listed under the
column “ Avg % Cnst@ 95% CL” as shown in Figure 13-11.
Table 13-17 Scan Protocols for Catphan 600

Aperture
Scan Images
Scan Scan / slice Recon DFOV
kV mA speed Pitch SFOV for LCD
mode range thicknes kernel (cm)
(s) analysis
s (mm)
I5 to S5,
20 /2i x Center 2
Axial 120 280 1 head N/A Small stnd 22.7
10 images
first
I5 to S5,
0.625 Center 2
Helical 120 230 1 head Small 20/10 stnd 22.7
:1 images
first

13-22 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
CT Acceptance Testing

Figure 13-11 The LCD tool (upper half) panel and the result panel, which displays the LCD
results for each individual image and the average of two images.

Average LCD result from two images

Expected Results and Variations


For catphan 600, the expected statistical Low Contrast Resolution value and tolerance are
listed in Table 13-18 for scan conditions in Table 13-17.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 13-23


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Table 13-18 Statistical Low Contrast Detectability (Resolution) Specifications

Phantom Scan Mode LCD Specification


Axial <= 3
Catphan 600
Helical <= 3

13-24 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Chapter 14
X-Ray Tube Specifications

Performix Ultra X-Ray Tube


MAXIRay CT ULTRA X-Ray
Tube
Table 14-1 Tube Model and Catalog Numbers

Component Model Number Catalog No.


2137130-4/ D3185T/
Performix Ultra Tube Unit
2137130-5 D3186T
Performix Ultra Housing Assembly 2137130-2 N/A
2120785-2
Performix Ultra Insert N/A
2120785-5 *
MAXIRay CT ULTRA Tube Unit 2137130-6 D3189T
MAXIRay CT UlTRA Tube Housing
2137130-2 N/A
(MAXIRay-CT-ULTRA-H)
MAXIRay CT ULTRA Tube Insert
2120785-5 N/A
(MAXIRay-CT-ULTRA-I)

NOTE: Throughout this chapter, Model Numbers may contain “-X” extensions, which
represent all available numeric characters. For example, 2137130-X refers to
2137130, 2137130-2, 2137130-3, etc.
NOTE: * 2120785-5 applies to Tube D3186T and D3189T.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Environmental Specifications

Non-Operating Environment (Reference IEC 60601-1)


Maintain a temperature range between -40C and 70C (relative humidity up to 95%
non-condensing) during storage and shipment of the tube unit.
Use GE Healthcare transport packaging during shipment.
You may ship via commercial airlines.

Operating Environment
Maintain an ambient temperature of less than 35C and 30 to 60% (non-condensing)
relative humidity (50% nominal) during operation

Diagnostic Source Assembly

Leakage Technique Factors


(Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (2) (i), 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (4) (i), IEC 60601-1-3, IEC 60601-2-28,
IEC 60601-2-44)
The leakage factors concerning leakage radiations for the Performix Ultra Tube Unit, Model
No. 2137130-X, with Tube Collimator, Model No. 5140001-4.
• 140 kV
• 33 mA

Quality Equivalent Filtration


(Reference IEC 60601-1-3, 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (2) (i) and 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (4) (i))
The Quality Equivalent Filtration of the 2137130-X X-ray Tube Assembly is 4.9 mm Al
minimum at a tube potential of 75 kV with the mounting plate attached. This filtration is
non-removable from the assembly in normal use.
The Quality Equivalent Filtration of the 2137130-X X-ray Tube Assembly is 0.32mm Al
minimum at a tube potential of 70kV without the mounting plate attached.

14-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Half Value Layer ( Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (m)(1), IEC


60601-2-44 and IEC 60601-1-3)
Minimum allowed Half Value layer:

80kV 2.9 mm Al
100kV 3.6 mm Al
120kV 4.3 mm Al
140kV 5.0 mm Al

CT Scan Ratings
These ratings apply to a system with computer controlled technique selection, scan mode,
and scan duration.
The system uses a math model to track tube temperature.
This tube cooling algorithm delays the start of a scan, if necessary, to avoid exceeding
temperatures that may damage the tube anode or unit.
Table 14-2 Performix Ultra Target Load in Kilowatts for Selected Scan Technique

mA 80 kV 100 kV 120 kV 140 kV


40 3.2 4.0 4.8 5.6
70 5.6 7.0 8.4 9.8
100 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
120 9.6 12.0 14.4 16.8
140 11.2 14.0 16.8 19.6
170 13.6 17.0 20.4 23.8
200 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0
210 16.8 21.0 25.2 29.4
230 18.4 23.0 27.6 32.2
240 19.2 24.0 28.8 33.6
280 22.4 28.0 33.6 39.2
290 23.2 29.0 34.8 40.6
340 27.2 34.0 40.8 47.6
350 28.0 35.0 42.0 49.0

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

mA 80 kV 100 kV 120 kV 140 kV


360 28.8 36.0 43.2 50.4
380 30.4 38.0 45.6 53.2
400 32.0 40.0 48.0 na
420 na 42.0 50.4 na
440 na na 52.8 na

NOTE: Small focal spot used for exposures less than or equal to 24kW. Large focal spot used
for exposures over 24kW.

Performix Ultra Tube Assembly

Classification and Compliance (Reference IEC 60601-1)


The 2137130-X X-Ray tube assemblies were tested to IEC 60601-2-28 standards and were
found to be in compliance with this standard.
• Type of protection against electric shock: Class 1

Marking(Reference IEC 60601-2-28)


The assembly carries two identification labels that list the manufacturer, model number,
serial number and the nominal X-Ray tube voltage of the tube insert and housing
components, which comprise the tube assembly.
When applicable, the X-ray Tube Assembly also carries labels to certify compliance with
regulation of addressee states (US Federal Regulation CFR Sub-Chapter J, Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory, CSA and CE Marking).

Reference Axis for Target Angle and Focal Track


Normal to longitudinal axis of the X-Ray tube

14-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Figure 14-1 Reference Axis for Target Angle and Focal Track
Reference Axis

Focal Track
7 degrees from Ref. Axis

Maximum High Voltage (Reference IEC 60613)


140 kVp

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

High Voltage Connection


This tube is a bi-polar type, in which both the Anode and Cathode receive high voltage. The
Anode and Cathode high voltage cables are connected to the X-Ray tube assembly with
federal standard type connectors with three conductors.
Figure 14-2 HV Connection System Diagram

Principle Dimensions (with mounting bracket)


Width: 506.4mm
Height: 847mm
Depth: 320.9mm

Weight
Without Mounting Plate: 84 kg
With Mounting Plate: 90 kg

14-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

X-Ray Tube Assembly Heating and Cooling Curves (Reference IEC 60613
and 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (2) (ii))
The following chart reflects maximum tube performance. The system software ultimately
limits tube operation.
Figure 14-3 Tube Assembly Heating and Cooling Curves
Performix Ultra Assembly Heating and Cooling Curves

3.5 kW anode input power

2 kW anode input power


Kilojoules

1 kW anode input power

Cooldown

Time (seconds)

NOTE: All Assembly Heating and Cooling curves were generated with the X-Ray tube oil
pump and fans operating normally.

Thermal Characteristics of X-Ray Tube Assembly (Reference IEC 60613)


• Heat storage capacity of X-Ray tube assembly: 10 MHU (7.4 MJ)
• Maximum continuous heat dissipation of X-Ray Tube Assembly: 4.8kW (3.5 kW from
maximum continuous anode power, 830W from pump and fan(s), 492 W from stator,
17W from filament).
Applicable operation condition of kV/mA is as below:

kV 80 100 120 140


mA 40 35 30 25

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-7


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Performix Ultra Tube Insert


Length 35.4 cm
Diameter 23.4 cm

Target Material
Tungsten - Rhenium focal track on a molybdenum alloy substrate backed by graphite

Maximum High Voltage (Reference IEC 60613)


140 kVp

Dual Focal Spots: (Reference IEC 60336)


Small Focal Spot:
• 0.7 x 0.6 Nominal Focal Spot Value IEC 60336/1993
Loading Factors: 120kV, 125mA
• 0.9 x 0.7 Nominal Focal Spot Value IEC 60336/2005
Focal Spot Position: Aligned with the Reference Axis +/- 1.5mm

Large Focal Spot:


• 0.9 x 0.9 Nominal Focal Spot ValueIEC 60336/1993
Loading Factors: 120kV, 250mA
• 1.2x 1.1 Nominal Focal Spot Value IEC 60336/2005
Focal Spot Position: Aligned with the Reference Axis +/- 1.5mm

Target Angle with respect to Reference Axis (Reference IEC 60601-2-28)


7 degrees

Rotor Speed
8400 RPM

14-8 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Data Required for Driving the Rotating Anode (Reference IEC 60601-2-28)
Acceleration: 12 seconds, 0 to 140Hz
Maximum Current During Boost: 24A, 3-phase motor, 280Hz (to produce 140Hz drive)
Steady State: 7A at 480V, 3-phase motor, 280Hz
Brake Time: 30 seconds, 12A, 3-phase motor, 140Hz to 20Hz

Maximum Anode Heat Capacity (Reference IEC 60613 and 21CFR 1020.30
(h) (2) (ii))
6.3 MHU / 4700 kJ
Figure 14-4 Performix Ultra Anode Heating and Cooling Curves
Performix Ultra Anode Heating and Cooling Curves

24 kW
12 kW

8 kW

4 kW
Kilojoules

2 kW

Cooldown

Time (seconds)

NOTE: The Figure 14-4 chart reflects maximum tube performance. The system software
ultimately limits tube operation.

Serial Exposure Rating (Reference IEC 60613)


Controlled by system software

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-9


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Single Exposure Load Rating (Reference IEC 60613)


Figure 14-5 Maximum Anode Input Power for Single Exposure Radiographic Ratings
kVp X mA per exposure (in thousands)

Lg. Spot

Sm. Spot

Maximum Exposure Time (in seconds)


Note: Based on initial storage of 1200 kJ

14-10 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Figure 14-6 Large Spot Single Exposure Technic Limits


Large Spot Single Exposure Technic Limits (90kVA)

450

350

250
mA

150

50
80 kV
100 kV
0 120 kV
0 10 140 kV
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Time – Sec. 110 120

Large Spot Single Exposure Technic Limits (75kVA)

400

300
mA
200

100
80
0 100
0
10

120
20
30

kV
40
50
60

140
70
80
90
100

Time – Sec.
110
120

NOTE: Large Focal Spot used for exposures over 24kW. Limits based on initial storage of
383kJ.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-11


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 14-7 Small Spot Single Exposure Technic Limits (90kVA/75kVA)


Small Spot Single Exposure Technic Limits (90kVA/75kVA)

300

250

200
mA
150

100

50
80 kV
0 100 kV
0 10 120 kV
20 30 40 50 60 70 140 kV
Time – Sec. 80 90 100
110 120

NOTE: Based on initial storage of 383 kJ.

Nominal Anode Input Power (Reference IEC 60613)


53.2 kW (0.1 sec.)

Maximum Filament Current (Reference IEC 60613)


6.5 A

Electron Emission Curves (Reference IEC 60613)


The emission curves in Figure 14-8 and Figure 14-9 satisfy IEC 60613, Section 4.5.

14-12 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Figure 14-8 Large Spot Electron Emission Curves


Large Filament Emission Curves
Beam Current (mA)

Filament Drive Current (A)

Figure 14-9 Small Spot Election Emission Curves


Small Filament Emission Curves
Beam Current (mA)

Filament Drive Current (A)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-13


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Focal Spot Modulation Transfer Function


• 1.2mm (W) x 1.2mm (L) and 0.9mm (W) x 0.7mm (L) 
(Traditional Methodology)

MODULATION TRANSFER FUNCTION


WIDTH DIRECTION
MODULATION TRANSFER FUNCTION

1.0 1.2 mm W x 1.2 mm L FOCAL SPOT


0.9 STANDARD MAGNIFICATION 1.3

0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
SPATIAL FREQUENCY – LINE PAIRS/mm

MODULATION TRANSFER FUNCTION


1.0
LENGTH DIRECTION
MODULATION TRANSFER FUNCTION

0.9 1.2 mm W x 1.2 mm L FOCAL SPOT


STANDARD MAGNIFICATION 1.3
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3

0.2
0.1
0
0 .2 .4 .6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0
SPATIAL FREQUENCY – LINE PAIRS/mm

14-14 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

1.0
MODULATION TRANSFER FUNCTION
0.9
0.8 MODULATION TRANSFER FUNCTION
WIDTH DIRECTION
0.7 0.9 mm W x 0.7 mm L FOCAL SPOT
0.6 STANDARD MAGNIFICATION 1.3

0.5
0.4
0.3

0.2
0.1
0
0 .2 .4 .6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0
SPATIAL FREQUENCY – LINE PAIRS/mm
MODULATION TRANSFER FUNCTION

1.0
0.9 MODULATION TRANSFER FUNCTION
LENGTH DIRECTION
0.8
0.9 mm W x 0.7 mm L FOCAL SPOT
0.7 STANDARD MAGNIFICATION 1.3
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 .2 .4 .6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

SPATIAL FREQUENCY – LINE PAIRS/mm

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-15


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Environmental Health & Safety (EHS) Information


The Performix Ultra X-Ray Tube Assembly contains potentially dangerous materials, but
does not present any danger as long as it is neither opened nor disassembled.

WARNING: Do not discard the X-Ray Tube Assembly among industrial waste or domestic
garbage.

WARNING: A damaged X-Ray Tube Assembly should not be dispatched through the
national postal service.
Your local GE Healthcare field service representative will advise you on the suitable means
of disposal.
Send any X-Ray Tube to be discarded to the GE Healthcare Service network, where it will be
sent to a recycling center for proper disposal.

Hazardous Materials
The X-Ray Tube Assembly contains the following potentially hazardous materials:
Lead: Lead salts are toxic and their ingestion may cause serious problems. The working of
lead is subject to regulations.
Oil: Univolt 54 and Crosstrans 206 mineral oil are not toxic, but the prevailing environmental
regulations should be observed for their disposal or recovery. For example, it is forbidden to
dispose of these oils in the wastewater or sewerage system or in the natural environment.

Precautions
Take all the necessary precautions for the personnel handling the recovery or destruction of
X-Ray Tube Assemblies, and in particular against the risks due to lead. These personnel must
be informed of the danger involved and of the necessity to observe the safety measures.

14-16 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Performix Plus X-Ray Tube


X-Ray Tube Model Numbers
The PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly, designed for the BrightSpeed Excel/Edge/Elite
and Lightspeed16/Plus/Ultra CT systems, has the base model number 2137130. Throughout
this chapter, model numbers may contain "-x" (i.e. 2137130-x). In these instances "x" can be
the blank character or any integer. For example, in 2137130-x, "-x" refers to 2137130,
2137130-2, 2137130-3, etc. Note that in addition to the tube model numbers, unique serial
numbers are assigned to each tube assembly and insert manufactured. These serial
numbers can be found on the labeling on the tube housing.
Table 14-3 Tube Model and Catalog Numbers

Component Model Number Catalog No.


2137130-15 D3889T
PerformixTM Plus Tube Assembly 2137130-16 D3890T
5401074
PerformixTM Plus Insert (X-ray Tube) 5401074-5
N/A

Environmental Specifications

Non-Operating Environment
(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
Maintain a temperature range between -40°C and 70°C (from 10% to 100% relative
humidity) during storage and shipment of the tube assembly. Use GE Healthcare transport
packaging during shipment. Commercial airline shipment is permissible.

Operating Environment
Maintain a CT room ambient temperature range of 18°C - 26°C and 30% to 60%
(non-condensing) relative humidity (50% nominal) during operation. This CT room ambient
temperature range ensures that the temperature inside the gantry covers does not exceed
the tube maximum ambient operating temperature of 45°C. Operating altitude range
(relative to sea level): -150m to 2400m.
System errors may result when attempting to operate the anode rotation circuit if the tube
assembly has been brought into the operating environment shortly after being stored or
transported at temperatures below 18°C. Error-free operation can be ensured by allowing
the oil circulation pump and heat exchanger to be operated for 40 min. prior to energizing

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-17


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

the anode rotation circuit if the storage or transportation ambient was below 18°C (this 40
min. period covers tube assemblies maintained down to the non-operating environment
lower limit of -40°C).

X-ray Characteristics

Leakage Technique Factors


(Reference: IEC 60601-1-3, IEC 60601-2-28 and 21CFR 1020.30(h)(2))
The X-ray Tube Assembly is rated for a continuous anode input power of 3.5kW. This value is
utilized in determining the following leakage radiation measurement loading factors for the
PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly:
• 140 kV
• 25mA

Total Filtration
(Reference: IEC 60601-1-3:1994, IEC 60601-2-28:1993 and 21 CFR 1020.30(h)(2))

Permanent Filtration
(Reference: IEC 60601-1-3:2008, IEC 60601-2-28:2010 and 21 CFR 1020.30(h)(2))
The Quality Equivalent Filtration of the PerformixTM Plus X-ray Tube Assembly is 4.9 mm Al
minimum at a tube potential in the range of 70-75 kV. This filtration is non-removable from
the assembly in normal use.

Applicable Regulations and Standards

Applicable Regulations and Standards


The PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly complies with the applicable requirements of the
following regulations and standards:
• Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices when bearing the following CE
mark of conformity:

• Authorized representative for Europe/European registered place of business:

14-18 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

GE Medical Systems SCS


Quality Assurance Manager
283 rue de la Minière
78530 BUC France
Tel +33 130704040

• Code of Federal Regulations, Title 21, Part 820 – Quality System Regulation
• Code of Federal Regulations, Title 21, Sub chapter J – Radiological Health
• IEC 60601-1:1988/2005 ; AAMI ES60601-1; CSA C22.2#60601-1
• IEC 60601-1-3:1994/2008
• IEC 60601-2-28:1993/2010
GE Medical Systems is ISO 9001 (2008) and ISO 13485 (2003) certified

Classification
(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28:1993/2010)
The PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly has the following classification:
• Type of protection against electric shock: CLASS 1

Reference Axis for Target Angle and Focal Spots


(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
The reference axis for the target angle and focal spot dimensions is normal to the
longitudinal axis of both the X-ray tube and the x-ray tube assembly, and passes through
the focal spot as shown in Figure 14-10 below.

Figure 14-10 Reference Axis for target angle and focal track

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-19


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

X-ray tube/tube assembly longitudinal axis

Focal spot on
target focal track

Cathode structure

Focal track 7°
Reference axis

HV Connection
(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
The PerformixTM Plus X-ray Tube is a bipolar x-ray tube assembly. The anode (+) and cathode
(-) high voltage cables are connected to the X-Ray tube assembly with 3-conductor
connectors complying with US Federal Standard design. This x-ray tube assembly is
designed for use with the BrightSpeed (Excel/Edge/Elite)/Lightspeed (16/Plus/Ultra) x-ray
generator (part number 2371333-2 upgraded with 5456518 Rotation Board).
The accessible metal parts of the X-Ray Tube Assembly body and flexible conductive
housing of high-voltage cables must be connected to the conductive enclosure of the
high-voltage generator.

Focal Spot Location and Principal Dimensions


(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28:1993/2010)
The position of the focal spots within the X-ray Tube Assembly is shown in Figure 2 below.
This position is referenced to three mutually orthogonal reference planes visually indicated
in the figure (x, y, z). When the X-ray Tube Assembly is mounted at the 12:00 position in the
BrightSpeed and Lightspeed CT systems, the z-reference plane is parallel to the scan plane,
the y-reference plane is parallel to the table top, and the x-reference plane is perpendicular
to both the scan plane and the table top.
Principal dimensions (height, width, depth) are also shown in this diagram. All dimensions
are in mm.

14-20 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Figure 14-11

The focal spot position is visually indicated on the X-ray Tube housing by the use of three
labels (solid circle with the words “Focal Spot”).

Pressure and Thermal Management


The PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Assembly is designed to be used with GE heat exchanger
assembly part number 5352112-x. The X-ray Tube Assembly and heat exchanger contain
the following pressure and thermal management features: bellows assembly, overpressure
switch, pressure relief valve and oil temperature sensors.

Type designations of suitable anode rotor driving and control equipment:


(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
This x-ray tube assembly is designed for use only with the rotor controller integral to the
BrightSpeed (Excel/Edge/Elite)/Lightspeed (16/Plus/Ultra) CT x-ray generator (part number
2371333-2 upgraded with 5456518 Rotation Board).

Data for auxiliary supplies required.


(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
A pressure switch and a thermal switch are integrated into the x-ray tube assembly to
provide feedback to the CT system concerning conditions of over-temperature and
over-pressure.
• Tube thermal switch: 76.7  2.8, 24V DC with 2 pin female Molex connector
• Pressure switch: 5  1 PSI, 24V DC with 2 pin male Molex connector

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-21


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 14-12 Electrical Connection Diagram (including HV cable)

Nominal Tube Voltage


(Reference: IEC 60613)
140 kVp

Construction
(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)

14-22 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

The X-Ray Tube Housing is made of a lead-lined lightweight alloy. It is filled under vacuum
with specially processed insulating oil. A sealed cooling system for the insulating oil is
integral to the x-ray tube assembly. An expansion volume compensates for oil dilation at
permissible temperatures. The mass of the X-Ray Tube Assembly is approximately 91kg.
The mounting mechanism is integral to the tube assembly.

PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly Heating and Cooling Curves


(Reference: IEC 60613:1989 and 21 CFR 1020.30(h))
Figure 14-13 PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly Heating and Cooling Curves (based on
anode input power)
Kilojoules

Cooldown

Time (seconds)

Thermal characteristics
(Reference: IEC 60613)

Maximum Continuous Dissipation


(Reference: IEC 60613:1989)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-23


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Nominal Continuous Input Power


(Reference: IEC 60613:2010)
• Maximum continuous heat dissipation of X-Ray Tube Assembly: 4.8kW (3.5 kW from
maximum continuous anode power, 830W from pump and fans, 492 W from stator,
17W from filament)
Heat Storage Capacity
(Reference: IEC 60613:1989)
• Maximum X-ray Tube Assembly heat content: 7.4 MJ (10.0 MHU)

Beam Limiting Devices

The PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly must always be equipped with a beam-limiting
device in order to meet requirements for the maximum X-Ray beam extent required for its
specified applications.
The beam-limiting devices compatible with PerformixTM Plus tube assembly are:
• Collimator Assembly 5140000-4
Any PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube Assembly having beam limiting devices other than those
listed above is obliged to be checked for compliance examination for beam quality and
leakage radiation according to the requirements of IEC Standard 60601-1-3 and 21 CFR
1020.30(k)(m).

Nominal CT Scan Power Index


(Reference: IEC 60613:2010)
The nominal CT scan power index is 50.6 kW when employing the large focal spot.
The nominal CT scan power index is 24 kW when employing the small focal spot.

Envelope Voltage
(Reference: IEC 60613:2010)
0 kV with respect to earth (ground)

Envelope Current
(Reference: IEC 60613:2010)
3.5% at an x-ray tube voltage of 120kV

14-24 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

PerformixTM Plus X-Ray Tube (Insert)

Target Material
(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
The target material is a Tungsten-Rhenium focal track on a molybdenum alloy substrate
backed by graphite.

Nominal Anode Input Power


(Reference: IEC 60613: 1989)
The nominal anode input power is 53.2 kW for an anode heat content of 383 kJ (corresponds
to an equivalent anode input power of 63W).

Maximum Anode Heat Content


(Reference: IEC 60613;1989)
The maximum anode heat capacity is 4.7 MJ (6.3 MHU).

Nominal CT Anode Input Power


(Reference: IEC 60613:2010)
The nominal CT anode input power is 53.2 kW for the large focal spot

Continuous Anode Input Power


(Reference: IEC 60613:2010)
The continuous anode input power is 3.5 kW.

Focal Spots
(Reference: IEC 60336)

Small Focal Spot:


0.9 x 0.7 IEC 60336: 2005
0.7 x 0.6 IEC 60336: 1993
Loading Factors: 120kV, 100mA
Large Focal Spot:
1.2 x 1.1 IEC 60336: 2005

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-25


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

0.9 x 0.9 IEC 60336: 1993


Loading Factors: 120kV, 300mA

Reference Axis:
The reference axis for focal spot characteristics is defined to be normal to the mounting
surface of the X-ray Tube housing and passing through the center of the focal spot.

Target Angle with Respect to Reference Axis


(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
The target angle is 7º with respect to reference axis, which is normal to longitudinal axis of
the X-Ray tube.

Anode Rotation
(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
8400 RPM

X-ray Tube Minimum Inherent Filtration


(Reference: IEC 60601-1-3)
The minimum inherent filtration of the X-ray tube is 0.0 mm Al equivalent at 70 kV.

Anode Heating and Cooling Curve


(Reference: IEC 60613:1989 and 21 CFR 1020.30(h)(2))

14-26 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Figure 14-14 PerformixTM Plus Anode Heating and Cooling Curve

Kilojoules

Cooldown

Time (seconds)

Single Load Ratings


(Reference: IEC 60613 and 21 CFR 1020.30(h)(2)(iii))
Application of the single load ratings shown in Table 4 below are controlled by CT system
software and are limited by either anode loading or filament emission.
Table 14-4 Single load ratings for an initial anode heat content of 383kJ

5-second exposure 10-second exposure


Large Focal Small Focal Large Focal Small Focal
kv
Spot mA Spot mA Spot mA Spot mA
80 400 300 400 300
100 420 240 420 240
120 440 200 440 200
140 380 170 380 170

Serial Load Ratings


(Reference: IEC 60613 and 21 CFR 1020.30(h)(2)(iii))
Application of the serial load ratings shown in Table 5 below are controlled by CT system
software and are applicable for repeat exposures 10 minutes after each exposure.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-27


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Table 14-5 Serial load ratings (10 min inter-exposure delay) for an initial anode heat content
of 383kJ

5-second exposure 10-second exposure


Large Focal Small Focal Large Focal Small Focal
kv
Spot mA Spot mA Spot mA Spot mA
80 400 300 400 300
100 420 240 420 240
120 440 200 440 200
140 380 170 380 170

Maximum Filament Current


(Reference: IEC 60601-2-28)
The maximum filament current is 6.15 A for the large filament. The maximum filament
current is 6.54 A for the small filament.

Cathode Emission Characteristics


(Reference: IEC 60613)
The following figures are the Cathode Emission and V-I curves

14-28 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Figure 14-15 Cathode Emission Curves (Large Focal Spot)

140kV
120kV
80kV
Tube Current (mA)

100kV

Filament Current (A)

Figure 14-16 Cathode Emission Curves (Small Focal Spot)

100kV 80kV
Tube Current (mA)

120kV

140kV

Filament Current (A)

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-29


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Figure 14-17 Filament V-I Characteristics

Filament I (amperes rms)

Small Filament

Large Filament

Filament V (volts rms)

Environmental Health & Safety (EHS) Information


The X-Ray Tube assembly (Part Number 2137130-x) contains potentially dangerous
materials but does not present any danger as long as it is neither opened nor disassembled.

WARNING: Do not discard the X-Ray Tube Assembly among industrial waste or domestic
garbage.

WARNING: A damaged X-Ray Tube Assembly should not be dispatched through the
national postal service.
Your local GEHC field service will advise you on the suitable means of disposal. The X-Ray
Tube Assembly to be discarded should be forwarded to the GEHC Service network, and it will
be disposed of in a GEHC recycling center.

Hazardous Materials

The X-Ray Tube Assembly contains the following potentially dangerous materials:
Lead: Lead salts are toxic and their ingestion may cause serious problems. The working of
lead is subject to regulations.

14-30 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Oil: Univolt 54 and Crosstrans 206 mineral oil are not toxic, but the prevailing environmental
regulations should be observed for their disposal or recuperation. For example, it is
forbidden to dispose of these oils in the wastewater or sewage system or in the natural
environment.

Precautions
Take all the necessary precautions for the personnel handling the recovery or destruction of
X-Ray Tube Assemblies, and in particular against the risks due to lead. These personnel must
be informed of the danger involved and of the necessity to observe the safety measures.

WARNING: Electric Shock Hazard


To avoid the risk of electric shock, this X-ray Tube Assembly must only be connected to a
high voltage generator with protective earth. (See High Voltage Connection above)

Explanation of Symbols Used in Markings

compliance mark for Restriction of Hazardous Substances


(RoHS) regulations for China - 50 year Environment Friendly
Use Period (EFUP)

compliance mark for Waste Electrical and Electronic


Equipment Directive (WEEE)

focal spot location indicator

hot surface warning

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-31


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

manufacturer

date of manufacture

permanent filtration

model number or reference number

serial number

focal spots
(Large) (Small)

authorized representative for Europe/European registered


place of business

Routine Maintenance
Cleaning of the two inlet air filters of the heat exchanger assembly should be performed
annually; refer to the compatible CT system Service Manual for details about cleaning of
these filters.

14-32 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Tube Specif ications

Manufacturer Address

Manufacturer (Made for):

GE Medical Systems, LLC


4855 W. Electric Ave.
Milwaukee, WI 53219
USA

Manufactured at (Made by):

GE BE PRIVATE LIMITED
60, Export Promotion Industrial Park
Whitefield, Bangalore 560066
India

or

GE Medical Systems Monterrey, Mexico S.A. DE C.V.


Calle Espana No. 300, Parque Industrial Huinala, Apodaca,
Nuevo Leon CP 66645
Mexico

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 14-33


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

14-34 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Regulatory Information

Chapter 15
Regulatory Information

Applicable Regulations and Standards:


This product complies with the requirements of the following regulations and standards:
Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices when it bears the following CE
marking of conformity:

(After 1-May-2012, the above statement is applicable only for the scanner with NIO16
Console model number: 5411378-X).
Authorized representative for Europe/European registered place of business:
GE Medical Systems SCS
Quality Assurance Manager
283 rue de la Minière
78530 BUC France
Tel +33 130704040

• Code of Federal Regulations, Title 21, Part 820 -Quality System Regulation
• Code of Federal Regulations, Title 21, Sub chapter J -Radiological Health
Federal U.S. law restricts this device for sale by or on the order of a physician.
GE Healthcare is ISO 9001 and ISO 13485 certified.
• Applicable standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), an independent
testing laboratory
• Applicable standards of the Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
• Applicable standards of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC):

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 15-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

The scanner complies with IEC 60601-1: 1988 +A1:1991 +A2:1995 (all configurations),
IEC 60601-1: 2005 (if the scanner manufactured after 30-January-2012 and with NIO16
Console model number: 5411378-X), UL 60601-1: 2003 (all configurations) and
ANSI/AAMI ES60601-1: 2005 +A1: 2009 +A2:2010 (if the scanner manufactured after
30-January-2012 and with NIO16 Console model number: 5411378-X).
The system is classified as a Class I, IPX0 equipment, not suitable for use in the
presence of a flammable anaesthetic mixture with oxygen or nitrous oxide. It is rated
for continuous operation with intermittent loading. No sterilization is applied. The
patient table cradle and cradle accessories are considered Type B applied parts.
The system is intended to be used for head and whole body computed tomography.
The scanner complies with IEC 60601-1-1: 2000.
All portions specified in the section of Patient Environment in pre-installation manual
of the system are suitable for use in the patient environment.
The system should be used only with GE approved equipment.
The scanner complies with IEC 60601-1-2: 2001+A1: 2004 (ED2.1) (all configurations), IEC
60601-1-2: 2007(if the scanner manufactured after 30-January-2012 and with NIO16
Console model number: 5411378-X).
Detailed information concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility can be found in the
following section.
The system complies with the applicable portions of IEC 60601-2-28.

X-ray Source Performix Ultra Tube Unit


IEC 60601-2-28: 1993
Assembly Assembly

The scanner with radiation protection in accordance with IEC 60601-1-3: 1994 (all
configurations), IEC 60601-1-3: 2008 (if the scanner manufactured after
30-January-2012 and with NIO16 Console model number: 5411378-X).
The scanner complies with the applicable portions of IEC 60601-2-32.

Associated
Patient Table IEC 60601-2-32: 1994
Equipment

The scanner complies with IEC 60601-2-44.

LightSpeed Plus
LightSpeed Ultra IEC 60601-2-44: 2001
CT SCANNER
+A1:2002 (all configurations)
LightSpeed16
IEC 60601-2-44: 2009 (if the
LightSpeed Plus scanner manufactured after
CT SCANNER LightSpeed Ultra 30-January-2012 and with
LightSpeed16 NIO16 Console model
number: 5411378-X)

15-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Regulatory Information

Intended Use
The system is intended to be used for head and whole body computed tomography.

Indications For Use


The GE LightSpeed Computed Tomography X-ray system is intended to produce
cross-sectional images of the body by computer reconstruction of x-ray transmission data
taken at different angles and planes, patient for all ages, including Axial, Cine, Helical,
Cardiac, and Gated (Respiratory and Cardiac) acquisitions. These images may be obtained
either with or without contrast. This device may include signal analysis and display
equipment, patient, and equipment supports, components and accessories.
This device may include data and image processing to produce images in a variety of
trans-axial and reformatted planes. Further the images can be post processed to produce
additional imaging planes or analysis results.
The GE LightSpeed Series CT Scanner System is indicated for head, whole body, cardiac and
vascular X-ray Computed Tomography applications.
The device output is a valuable medical tool for the diagnosis of disease, trauma, or
abnormality and for planning, guiding, and monitoring therapy.
Patient Population:
Patient at all age, who is suspected with disease.
Operator Profile:
Operator including different level of CT technologists, who must be trained in CT system
operation and has sufficient knowledge of radiation.
Intended Use Environment:
The CT system intended to be used in Radiology, Oncology, Clinic, Emergency Room, etc.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 15-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

15-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Electromagnetic Compatibility

Chapter 16
Electromagnetic Compatibility

This equipment complies with IEC 60601-1-2:1993, or IEC 60601-1-2:2001 (different


generations) EMC standard for medical electrical equipment. The NIO16 console upgrade kit
complies with IEC 60601-1-2:2007. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. The equipment may cause radio frequency interference to other medical
and non-medical devices and radio communications.
To provide reasonable protection against such interference, this product complies the
radiated emission as per CISPR11 Group1 Class A standard limits.
Detailed requirements and recommendations about the power supply distribution and
installation are listed in the Site Preparation Manual.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by turning the
equipment on and off), the user (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to correct
the problem by one or more of the following measure(s):
 reorient or relocate the affected device(s)
 increase the separation between the equipment and the affected device
 power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device
 consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions
The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using other than
recommended interconnect cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users' authority to
operate the equipment.
All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded,
except when technologically prohibited. Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded
may result in the equipment causing radio frequency interference.
Do not use devices which intentionally transmit RF Signals (Cellular Phones, Transceivers, or
Radio Controlled Products) in the vicinity of this equipment as it may cause performance
outside the published specifications.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 16-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Recommended separation distances are detailed in the PIM document (Pre-installation


Manual).
The medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients,
and other people who may be around this equipment to comply fully with the above
equipment. In order to achieve the Electromagnetic Compatibility for a typical installation,
further detailed data & requirements are described in the Site Preparation Manual.

1.0 GENERAL SCOPE


This equipment complies with IEC60601-1-2: 2001 +A1: 2004 (ED2.1) (all configurations) and
IEC 60601-1-2: 2007 (ED3) (if the scanner manufactured after 30-January-2012 and with
NIO16 Console model number: 5411378-X) EMC standard for medical electrical equipment.
The LightSpeed Series System is suitable to be used in the electromagnetic environment, as
per the limits & recommendations described in the tables hereafter:
 Emission Compliance level & limits (Table 16-1)
 Immunity Compliance level & recommendations to maintain equipment clinical utility
(Table 16-2).
NOTE: This system complies with above mentioned EMC standard when used with supplied
cables up to maximum lengths referenced in the MIS MAPS or system cable
interconnect diagrams.

16-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Electromagnetic Compatibility

2.0 ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSION


Table 16-1 EMC Emissions Guidance & Declaration for LIghtSpeed Series System

EMC Emissions Guidance & Declaration for LightSpeed Series System


The LIghtSpeed Series System is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the LIghtSpeed Series System should assure that it is used in
such an environment.
Electromagnetic Environment
Emissions Test Compliance
Guidance
RF emissions The LIghtSpeed Series System
Group 1
CISPR 11 uses RF energy only for its
internal function. Therefore, its
RF emissions are very low and
RF emIssions are not likely to cause any
Class A interference in nearby
CISPR 11
electronic equipment

HarmonIc emissions The LIghtSpeed Series System


Not applicable
IEC 61000-3-2 is suitable for use in all
establishments other than
domestic and those directly
connected to the public
Voltage fluctuations/flicker low-voltage power supply
emissions Not applicable network that supplies
IEC 61000-3-3 buildings used for domestic
purposes.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 16-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

3.0 ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY


Table 16-2 EMC immunity Guidance & Declaration for LIghtSpeed Series System

EMC Immunity Guidance & Declaration for LightSpeed Series System


The LightSpeed Series System is Intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specIfied below.
The customer or the user of the LIghtSpeed Series System should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
IEC 60601-1-2 Test Electromagnetic Environment
Immunity Test Compliance Level
Level Guidance
Floors should be wood, concrete, or
Electrostatic
± 6 kV contact ± 6 kV contact ceramic tile If floors are covered with
discharge (ESD)
± 8 kV air ± 8 kV air synthetic material, the relative
IEC 61000-4-2
humIdity should be at least 30%.
±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power
Electrical fast Mains power quality should be that of
supply lines supply lines
transient/burst a typical commercial or hospital
± 1 kV for ± 1 kV for
IEC 61000-4-4 environment
input/output lines input/output lines
Mains power quality should be that of
Surge ± 1 kV line-line ± 1 kV line-line
a typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-5 ± 2 kV line-earth ± 2 kV line-earth
environment.
Mains power quality should be that of
Voltage dips, a typical commercial or hospital
short environment If the user of the
interruptions < 5 % UT < 5 % UT LIghtSpeed Series System requires
and voltage continued operation during power
(>95 % dip in UT) for (>95 % dip in UT) for
variations on mains interruptions, it is
power supply 5 seconds 5 seconds recommended that the LIghtSpeed
input lines Series System be powered from an
IEC 61000-4-11 uninterruptible power supply or a
battery.
Power
Power frequency magnetic fields
frequency
should be at levels characterIstic of a
(50/60 Hz) 3 A/m 3 A/m
typical location in a typical
magnetic field
commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

16-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMC Immunity Guidance & Declaration for LightSpeed Series System


The LightSpeed Series System is Intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specIfied below.
The customer or the user of the LIghtSpeed Series System should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
IEC 60601-1-2 Test Electromagnetic Environment
Immunity Test Compliance Level
Level Guidance
Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment should
be used no closer to any part of the
LIghtSpeed Series System, Including
cables, than the recommended
separation distance calculated from
the equation appropriate for the
frequency of the transmitter
Recommended Separation Distance
((see Table 16-3)
3.5
d = ------- P
3
3 VRMS 3 VRMS (80 MHz to 800 MHz (see Table 16-3)
150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3.5
Conducted RF d = ------- P
IEC 61000-4-6 3
(800 MHz to 2.5 GHz (see Table 16-3}
7
d = --- P
3
3 V/m 3 V/m
Radiated RF 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz where P IS the maximum output
IEC 61 000-4-3 power rating of the transmitter in
watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is
the recommended separation
distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF
transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey,a should
be less than the compliance level in
each frequency rangeb.
Interference may occur in the vicInity
of equipment marked with the
following symbol:

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 16-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

EMC Immunity Guidance & Declaration for LightSpeed Series System


The LightSpeed Series System is Intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specIfied below.
The customer or the user of the LIghtSpeed Series System should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
IEC 60601-1-2 Test Electromagnetic Environment
Immunity Test Compliance Level
Level Guidance
• Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, amateur radio. AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be
predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which the LIghtSpeed Series System is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance
level above, the LIghtSpeed Series System should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating
the LIghtSpeed Series System.
• Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz. field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
NOTE: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people

Table 16-3 Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF


communications equipment and the LightSpeed Series System

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications


equipment and the LightSpeed Series System
The LightSpeed Series System is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in
which radIated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the LightSpeed
Series System can help prevent electromagnetic Interference by maintaining a minimum
distance between portable and mobile RF communIcations equipment (transmitters) and
the LightSpeed Series System as recommended below, according to the maximum output
power of the communications equIpment
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter

150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
3.5 3.5 7
d = ------- P d = ------- P d = --- P
Rated Maximum 3 3 3
Output Power (P) of
Separation Distance Separation Distance Separation Distance
Transmitter Watts
meters meters meters
(W)
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.37 0.74
1 1.17 1.17 2.33
10 3.69 3.69 7.38

16-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Electromagnetic Compatibility

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications


equipment and the LightSpeed Series System
The LightSpeed Series System is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in
which radIated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the LightSpeed
Series System can help prevent electromagnetic Interference by maintaining a minimum
distance between portable and mobile RF communIcations equipment (transmitters) and
the LightSpeed Series System as recommended below, according to the maximum output
power of the communications equIpment
100 11.7 11.7 23.3
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the separation distance
can be estimated using the equation in the corresponding column, where P is the maximum
output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer.
NOTE: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation dIstance for the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
3. 1 LIMITATIONS MANAGEMENT:
Adhering to the distance separation recommended in Table 16-3, between 150KHz &
2.5GHz, will reduce disturbances recorded at the image level but may not eliminate all
disturbances. However, when installed and operated as specified herein, the system will
maintain its essential performance/basic safety by continuing to acquire, display, and store
diagnostic quality images safely.
*For example. a 1W mobile phone (800MHz to 2.5GHz carrier frequency) shall be put 2.3
meters apart from the LightSpeed Series System (in order to avoid image interference
risks).

4.0 USE LIMITATION:


4.1. External components
The use of accessories, transducers, and cables other than those specified may result in
degraded ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY of the EQUIPMENT and/or SYSTEM.

5.0 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS & ENVIRONMENT CONTROL:


In order to minimize interference risks, the following requirements shall apply.
5.1 Cable shielding & grounding
All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded.
Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in the equipment causing
radio frequency interference.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 16-7


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

5.2. This product complies the radiated emission as per CISPR11 Group1 Class A standard
limits.
The LightSpeed Series System is predominantly intended for use, in non-domestic
environments, and not directly connected to the Public Mains Network. The LightSpeed
Series System is predominantly intended for use (e.g. in hospitals) with a dedicated
supply system, and with a X-ray shielded room. In case of using in a domestic
environment (e.g. doctors' offices), in order to avoid interferences, it is recommended to
use a separated AC power distribution panel & line, with a X-ray shielded room.
5.3. Subsystem & accessories Power supply distribution
All components, accessories subsystems, systems which are electrically connected to
the LightSpeed Series System, must have all AC power supplied by the same power
distribution panel & line.
5.4. Stacked components & equipment
The LightSpeed Series System should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment; if adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the LightSpeed Series System should
be observed in order to verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be
used.
5.5. Low frequency magnetic field
In case of a digital LightSpeed Series System, the Gantry (digital detector) shall be apart
1 meter from the generator cabinet, and 1 meter apart from the analog (CRT) monitors.
These distance specifications will minimize the low frequency magnetic field
interference risk.
5.6. Static magnetic field limits
In order to avoid interference on the LightSpeed Series System, static field limits from
the surrounding environment are specified.
Static field is specified less than <1 Gauss in Examination room, and in the Control Area.
Static field is specified less than <3 Gauss in the Technical Room.
5.7. Electrostatic discharge environment & recommendations
In order to reduce electrostatic discharge interference, install a charge dissipative floor
material to avoid electrostatic charge buildup.
The relative humidity shall be at least 30 percent.
The dissipative material shall be connected to the system ground reference, it
applicable.

16-8 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Chapter 17
System Specifications

The following describes system components. For details, refer to subsystem specifications.
Table 17-1 Model NumbersTransporter

FDA
Component Model Number Rating Plate Locations
(Y/N)
(Scanner ID)
2378661-X
Gantry Lower, left Gantry base in rear
2383549-X Y
2383550-X
5411378-X (NIO16)
Operator Console Rear of cabinet Y
2377708-X (GOC4)
Right side, low on front leg
Table 2335179-X Y
Bottom on left leg
Generator 2371333-X Front Y
X-ray Tube Unit 2137130-X On Housing center Y
2214768-x Tube at 12 o’clock: on
Collimator Y
5140001-4 collimator front
Back horizontal surface of top
Power Distribution Unit 2326492-3 N
cover

NOTE: "X" is a variable numerical suffix that represents minor variations in design that do
not affect conformance with the requirements of the standard for Medical Electrical
Equipment; IEC60601-1:1988+A1: 1991+A2: 1995 or IEC60601-1: 2005 and identical
and some modified other standards as IEC.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Gantry Labeling (Reference 1010.3)


Figure 17-1 System Rating Plates Example

1. Manufacturer

2. Momentary Plus

3. Continuous

1. Manufacturer
2. Momentary Ultra

3. Continuous
(Plates on rear of Gantry)

1. Manufacturer

2. Momentary
3. Continuous

System Rating Plates

17-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Figure 17-2 Gantry Rating Plates Example

1.Manufacturer

2.Model No.
3.Serial No.
4.Manufactured
COMPLIES WITH RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS,21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

Gantry Rating Plates

(Plates on rear of Gantry)

Table Labeling (Reference 1010.3)


Figure 17-3 Table Rating Plates Example

1.Manufacturer

2.Model

3. Serial No. 2335179-x

4. Manufactured

Table Rating Plate

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

PDU Labeling (Reference 1010.3)


Figure 17-4 PDU Rating Plates Example

1.Manufacturer
GE HANGWEI MEDICAL SYSTEMS CO. LTD
2.Model Number No. 2 YONG CHANG NORTH ROAD
ECONOMIC-TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT ZONE
3.Serial Number BEIJING P.R. CHINA 100176
MADE FOR GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS CO.
4.Line Frequency POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT
MODEL No. 2326492-3
5.Input Power SERIAL No. ________________
INPUT VOLTAGE: 3~200//240, 380//480V
6.Momentary LINE FREQUENCY: 50/60Hz
INPUT POWER:
7.Continuous MOMENTARY 90KVA@ 0.85PF
CONTINOUS 20KVA
8.Weight WEIGHT: 770LBS. (350KGS)
MFG DATE: _____________
9.Manufacturing
Date PDU Rating Plate

17-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Console Labeling (Reference 1010.3)


Figure 17-5 Console Rating Plates Example

GE HANGWEI MEDICAL SYSTEMS CO., LTD.


NO.2 NORTH YONG CHANG STREET
1.Manufacturer BEIJING ECONOMIC-TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT ZONE
BEIJING, 100176, P. R. CHINA
2.Description
DESCRIPTION: OPERATOR CONSOLE
3.Model Number MODEL No. 5411378-11

4.Serial Number SERIAL No. :

5.Manufactured MANUFACTURED:
SOURCE: 120VAC 50/60Hz 15A

COMPLIES WITH RADIATION PROTECTION STANDARDS,


21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

MADE FOR GE HANGWEI MEDICAL SYSTEM CO., LTD.


NO.2 NORTH YONG CHANG STREET
BEIJING ECONOMIC-TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT ZONE
BEIJING, 100176, P. R. CHINA

1.Manufacturer MADE BY GE Healthcare Japan Corporation


7-127, Asahigaoka 4-chome, Hino-shi, Tokyo 191-8503 Japan

2.Model Number 5411378-31


Location of NIO16 console
3.Serial Number ENGTIO001
rating plate
AUGUST. 2009
4.Manufactured
120V ~ 50/60Hz 15A
COMPLIES WITH RADIATION PROTECTION STANDARDS,
21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

MADE FOR
GE HANGWEI MEDICAL SYSTEM CO., LTD.
NO.2 NORTH YONG CHANG STREET
BEIJING ECONOMIC & TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT ZONE
BEIJING, 100176, P. R. CHINA
BY
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS, LLC
3000 N GRANDVIEW BLVD., WAUKESHA, WI., U.S.A

Description: NIO Console


1.Manufacturer

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY


2.Model Number MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN MADE IN U.S.A

3.Serial Number MODEL


S/N
MANUFACTURED
4.Manufactured DESC

X-RAY EQUIPMENT CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.


AS TO ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FIRE, AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY. 310L

SA

Console Rating Plates

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Table 17-2 Month Translated Text

Month Translated Text


January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December

17-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Table 17-3 Supply voltage/current/frequency

Supply
Supply Supply
Component Model Name or Number Frequen
Power Voltage
cy
200//240
LightSpeed16 90 kVA VAC
LightSpeed Ultra *75kVA **380//480 **50/60
*System LightSpeed Plus VAC Hz
3 Phase
670 VDC
2378661-X 100 A 440/254
2383549-X 16 A VAC
Gantry
2383550-X 16/30/40 A 208/120 50/60 Hz
VAC
5411378-X (NIO16)
Operator Console 20 A 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
2377708-X (GOC4)
Table 2335179-X 10 A 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
200//240
VAC
Power Distribution **50/60
2326492-3 90 kVA **380//480
Unit Hz
VAC
3 Phase

NOTE: *System rating is attached to the gantry.


**Applicable for China.
NOTE: Input power of LightSpeed Plus is restricted to *75 kVA by the software but the
hardware has the potential to function with up to 90 kVA. “53 kW High Frequency
Generator Option” allows the system to be upgraded to 90 kVA. Caution: Be careful
of “facility design”. Please refer to [Power Requirement] section in the Pre-installation
manual.
NOTE: Only GE authorized equipment should be used together with CT system. All GE
approved options need to be provied their power from CT.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-7


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Table 17-4 System Dimensions

Size (inches) Size (cm) Weight Weight


Component
w h d w h d (lbs) (kg)

39.6
Gantry 87.6 74.1 223 188.1 100.1 2800 1270

26.75-34.
75
Keyboard
table 102-12
Operator GOC4 49 40-48 123.8 68-88.3 396 180
26.75-31. 2.8
Console 75
Monitor
table
NIO16 19 26 29 47 65.6 74 159 72
Table & Cradle 24 44 199 61 112 505 750 340
Power Distribution
28 42 22 711 1067 559 770 349
Unit
Total Weight with Operator Console NIO16 5141 2332
Total Weight with Operator Console GOC4 6179 2802

NOTE: Computer Console cannot be used in a scan room.

Helical High-Contrast Spatial Resolution


Scan Technique: 0.5 to 1-second gantry rotation, 120 kVp, 40 to 440 mA, HQ acquisition
mode with 1.25mm to 10mm nominal image thickness, 1.875mm to 15mm table
travel/rotation, 25 or 50 cm scan FOV, 512 recon.
Standard (25-cm DFOV/Standard Algorithm):
• 0.584mm limiting resolution
• 4.0 lp/cm @ 50% MTF
• 6.5 lp/cm @ 10% MTF
• 8.5 lp/cm @ 0% MTF
High-Res (10-cm DFOV/Edge Algorithm):
• 0.324mm limiting resolution
• 8.5 lp/cm @ 50% MTF
• 13.0 lp/cm @ 10% MTF
• 15.4 lp/cm @ 0% MTF

17-8 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Line pair values decrease with larger focal spot (by 5% with Standard and by 7% with Edge);
limiting resolution is unaffected.
Measurement Basis: Limiting resolution is determined by reconstruction filter cutoff. The
50% and 10% MTF are demonstrated on GE Performance Phantom. MTF is calculated from
a two-dimensional Fourier transform of the point spread function using pixel data around a
0.05mm tungsten wire.

Axial High-Contrast Spatial Resolution


Scan Technique: 0.5 to 4.0 sec scan time, 120 kVp, 40 to 440 mA, 1.25mm to 10mm nominal
image thickness, 25 or 50cm scan FOV, 512 recon.
Standard (25 cm DFOV/Standard Algorithm):
• 0.584mm limiting resolution
• 4.0 lp/cm @ 50% MTF
• 6.5 lp/cm @ 10% MTF
• 8.5 lp/cm @ 0% MTF
High-Res (10 cm DFOV/Edge Algorithm):
• 0.324mm limiting resolution
• 8.5 lp/cm @ 50% MTF
• 13.0 lp/cm @ 10% MTF
• 15.4 lp/cm @ 0% MTF
Line pair values decrease with larger focal spot (by 5% Standard and by 7% with Edge);
limiting resolution is unaffected.
Measure Basis: Limiting resolution is determined by reconstruction filter cutoff. The 50% and
10% MTF are demonstrated on GE Performance Phantom. MTF is calculated from a
two-dimensional Fourier transform of the point spread function using pixel data around a
0.05mm tungsten wire.
Refer to Quality Assurance.

Helical Low-Contrast Detectability - Statistical

Standard Algorithm
On 8 inch (20 cm) CATPHAN phantom: 5mm @ 0.30% at 13.3 mGy (1.33 Rad).
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 60 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, 0.625:1 pitch mode with 10mm nominal
image thickness, 12.5mm table travel/rotation, 25 cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and
standard algorithm.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-9


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

On 8 inch (20 cm) CATPHAN phantom: 3mm @ 0.30% at 37.2 mGy (3.72 Rad).
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 180 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, 0.625:1 pitch mode with 10mm nominal
image thickness, 12.5mm table travel/rotation, 25 cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and
standard algorithm.

ASiR Reconstruction
On 8 inch (20 cm) CATPHAN phantom: 5mm @ 0.30% at 10.0 mGy (1.00 Rad).
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 45 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, 0.625:1 pitch mode with 10mm nominal
image thickness, 12.5mm table travel/rotation, 25 cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and
standard algorithm with ASiR Reconstruction (60%).
On 8 inch (20 cm) CATPHAN phantom: 3mm @ 0.30% at 27.9 mGy (2.79 Rad).
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 135 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, 0.625:1 pitch mode with 10mm nominal
image thickness, 12.5mm table travel/rotation, 25 cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and
standard algorithm with ASiR Reconstruction (60%).
Test method is as follows:
1. Measure mean CT # values of an array of pixel groups who’s area (pixel group) equals
the size of the detectable object size.
2. Calculate the standard deviation for the means of the pixel groups.
3. Statistically calculate the % contrasted change needed to ensure with 95% confidence
that an object with this contrast could be detected with the above background noise,
and 95% confidence that it’s not detected when not present.
Measurement Basis: Dose is measured on top surface of the phantom using a pencil probe
with a 10 cm chamber length, with the phantom and probe held stationary, and with scan
time equal to time needed to acquire 30 images in helical mode. Dose is average dose per
image for 30 contiguous images (+/- 15% expected deviation).

Axial Low-Contrast Detectability - Statistical

Standard Algorithm
On 8 inch (20 cm) CATPHAN phantom: 5mm @ 0.30% 13.3 mGy (1.33 Rad).
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 100 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, axial acquisition mode with 10 mm
nominal image thickness, 25 cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm.

17-10 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

On 8 inch (20 cm) CATPHAN phantom: 3mm @ 0.30% at 37.2 mGy (3.72 Rad).
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 280 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, axial acquisition mode with 10 mm
nominal image thickness, 25 cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm.

ASiR Reconstruction
On 8 inch (20 cm) CATPHAN phantom: 5mm @ 0.30% 10.0 mGy (1.00 Rad).
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 75 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, axial acquisition mode with 10 mm
nominal image thickness, 25 cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm with
ASiR Reconstruction (60%).
On 8 inch (20 cm) CATPHAN phantom: 3mm @ 0.30% at 27.9 mGy (2.79 Rad).
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 210 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, axial acquisition mode with 10 mm
nominal image thickness, 25 cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm with
ASiR Reconstruction (60%).
Test method is as follows:
1. Measure mean CT# values of an array of pixel groups who’s area (pixel group) equals the
size of the detectable object size.
2. Calculate the standard deviation for the means of the pixel groups.
3. Statistically calculate the % contrasted change needed to ensure with 95% confidence
that an object with this contrast could be detected with the above background noise,
and 95% confidence that it’s not detected when not present.
Measurement Basis: Dose is measured on top surface of the phantom using a pencil probe
with a 10 cm chamber length, with the phantom and probe held stationary. (+/- 15%
expected deviation).

Helical Image Noise (Reference 21CFR 1020.33 (c) (3) (i) and
YY0310)

Standard Algorithm
Noise: ≦ 0.35% (nominal 0.32%) at 28.5 mGy
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 160 mAs, 0.5 to 2.0 second gantry rotation, 0.625:1 pitch mode with 10mm nominal
image thickness, 12.5mm table travel/rotation, 25cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and
standard algorithm.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-11


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

ASiR Reconstruction
Noise: ≦ 0.35% (nominal 0.32%) at 17.1 mGy (ASiR 40%)
Suggested Scan Technique:
120 kVp, 95 mAs, 0.5 to 2.0 second gantry rotation, 0.625:1 pitch mode with 10mm nominal
image thickness, 12.5mm table travel/rotation, 25cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and
standard algorithm with ASiR reconstruction.
Measurement Basis: Noise is demonstrated on 8.5 in GE Quality Assurance phantom
provided with the system using a 25mm x 25mm box ROI.

Axial Image Noise / Uniformity / Mean CT Number (Reference


21CFR 1020.33 (c) (3) (i) and YY0310)

Head
Standard Algorithm
Noise: ≦ 0.35% (nominal 0.32%) at 29.3 mGy
Suggested Scan Technique:
120kVp, 260 mAs, 0.6 to 4.0 second gantry rotation, 10mm nominal image thickness, 2i
mode reconstruction, 25cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm.
ASiR Reconstruction
Noise: ≦ 0.35% (nominal 0.32%) at 17.6 mGy (ASiR 40%)
Suggested Scan Technique:
120kVp, 155 mAs, 0.6 to 4.0 second gantry rotation, 10mm nominal image thickness, 2i
mode reconstruction, 25cm SFOV, 25 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm with ASiR
recunstruction.
Measurement Basis: Noise is demonstrated on 8.5 in GE Quality Assurance phantom
provided with the system using a 25mm x 25mm box ROI.

CT Number Linearity
Mean CT number: 0+/-3HU
CT Number Uniformity
CT number of Uniformity: 0+/-3HU

17-12 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Body
Standard Algorithm
Noise: ≦ 1.035% (nominal 0.90%)
Suggested Scan Technique:
120kVp, 260 mAs, 1 second gantry rotation, 10mm nominal image thickness, 2i mode
reconstruction, 50 cm SFOV, 35 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm.

ASiR Reconstruction
Noise: ≦ 1.035% (nominal 0.90%) (ASiR 40%)
Suggested Scan Technique:
120kVp, 155 mAs, 1 second gantry rotation, 10mm nominal image thickness, 2i mode
reconstruction, 50 cm SFOV, 35 cm DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm with ASiR
recunstruction.
Measurement Basis: Noise is demonstrated on 30cm water phantom provided with the
system using a 25mm x 25mm box ROI.
CT Number Linearity
Mean CT number: 0+/-6HU

CT Number Uniformity
CT number of Uniformity: 0+/-8HU
NOTE: The body specification stated below is to comply with China Regulation and meet the
requirement of YY0310-2005 standard.
Noise: ≦ 0.35% (nominal 0.32%) at 29.3 mGy
Uniformity: 0+/-4HU
Mean CT number: 0+/-4HU
Suggested Scan Technique: 120kVp, 260 mA, 1sec, 2i x 10mm, 25cm SFOV, 25 cm
DFOV, 512 recon, and standard algorithm. Dose is dose per image.
Measurement Basis: Noise is demonstrated on 20cm water phantom using a 25mm x
25mm box ROI.

Dose Performance
Table 17-5 Helical Dose (For 16 slice)

CTDI expressed in mGy; CTDI expressed in mGy/100 mAs:


43.4 mGy center 18.1 mGy/100 mAs center
Head Head
43.0 mGy surface 17.9 mGy/100 mAs surface

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-13


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

CTDI expressed in mGy; CTDI expressed in mGy/100 mAs:


14.2 mGy center 5.9 mGy/100 mAs center
Body Body
25.7 mGy surface 10.7 mGy/100 mAs surface
CTDI100 expressed in mGy (Rad): CTDI100 expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
45.8 mGy (4.20 Rad) center 19.1 mGy/100 mAs center
Head Head
47.8 mGy (4.327 Rad) surface 19.9 mGy/100 mAs surface
13.9 mGy (1.27 Rad) center 5.8 mGy/100 mAs center
Body Body
28.3 mGy (2.60 Rad) surface 11.9 mGy/100 mAs surface
CTDIw expressed in mGy (Rad): CTDIw expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
Head 47.0 mGy (4.35 Rad) Head 19.6 mGy/100 mAs
Body 23.8 mGy (2.18 Rad) Body 9.9 mGy/100 mAs

Scan Technique:
120kVp, 240 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, 16 x 1.25, pitch 0.9375:1,
18.75mm/rotation, 10mm slice thickness.
Measurement Basis: Helical CTDI, CTDI100, and CTDIw dose calculated from measured axial
CTDI, CTDI100, and CTDIw data and adjusted for 0.9375:1 scan mode and 240 mAs. Dose is
average dose per image for 30 contiguous images (+/- 15% expected deviation).
Table 17-6 Helical Dose (For 4/8 slices)

CTDI expressed in mGy; CTDI expressed in mGy/100 mAs:


32.6 mGY center 17.2 mGy/100 mAs center
Head Head
35.7 mGy surface 18.8 mGy/100 mAs surface
9.2 mGy center 4.9 mGy/100 mAs center
Body Body
21.4 mGy surface 11.3 mGy/100 mAs surface
CTDI100 expressed in mGy (Rad): CTDI100 expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
42.0 mGy (4.20 Rad) center 22.1 mGy/100 mAs center
Head Head
42.7 mGy (4.327 Rad) surface 22.5 mGy/100 mAs center
12.7 mGy (1.27 Rad) center 6.7 mGy/100 mAs center
Body Body
26.0 mGy (2.60 Rad) surface 13.7 mGy/100 mAs surface
CTDIw expressed in mGy (Rad): CTDIw expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
Head 42.4 mGy (4.35 Rad) Head 22.3 mGy/100 mAs
Body 21.5 mGy (2.18 Rad) Body 11.3 mGy/100 mAs

Scan Technique:
120kVp, 190 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, 0.75:1 acquisition mode with 10mm
nominal image thickness, 15mm table travel/rotation, 512 recon, and standard algorithm.

17-14 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Measurement Basis: Helical CTDI, CTDI100, and CTDIw dose calculated from measured axial
CTDI, CTDI100, and CTDIw data and adjusted for 0.75:1 scan mode and 190 mAs. Dose is
average dose per image for 30 contiguous images (+/- 15% expected deviation).
Table 17-7 Axial Dose (For 16 slice)

CTDI expressed in mGy; CTDI expressed in mGy/100 mAs:


44.2 mGY center 17.0 mGy/100 mAs center
Head Head
43.6 mGy surface 16.8 mGy/100 mAs surface
14.2 mGy center 5.5 mGy/100 mAs center
Body Body
26.1 mGy surface 10.0 mGy/100 mAs surface
CTDI100 expressed in mGy (Rad): CTDI100 expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
46.5 mGy center 17.9 mGy/100 mAs center
Head Head
48.6 mGy surface 18.7 mGy/100 mAs surface
14.0 mGy center 5.4 mGy/100 mAs center
Body Body
29.1 mGy surface 11.2 mGy/100 mAs surface
CTDIw expressed in mGy (Rad): CTDIw expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
Head 47.8 mGy Head 18.4 mGy/100 mAs
Body 24.2 mGy Body 9.3 mGy/100 mAs

Scan Technique:
120kVp, 260 mAs, 0.5 to 1.0 second gantry rotation, 16 x 1.25, 10mm nominal image
thickness, 2i mode reconstruction. Dose is dose per image.
Table 17-8 Axial Dose (For 4/8 slice)

CTDI expressed in mGy; CTDI expressed in mGy/100 mAs:


36.5 mGY center 14.0 mGy/100 mAs center
Head Head
39.8 mGy surface 15.3 mGy/100 mAs surface
10.4 mGy center 4.0 mGy/100 mAs center
Body Body
24.5 mGy surface 9.4 mGy/100 mAs surface
CTDI100 expressed in mGy (Rad): CTDI100 expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
46.8 mGy center 18.0 mGy/100 mAs center
Head Head
47.7 mGy surface 18.3 mGy/100 mAs surface
14.3 mGy center 5.5 mGy/100 mAs center
Body Body
29.3 mGy surface 11.3 mGy/100 mAs surface
CTDIw expressed in mGy (Rad): CTDIw expressed in mGy/100 mAs:
Head 47.4 mGy Head 18.2 mGy/100 mAs
Body 24.3 mGy Body 9.4 mGy/100 mAs

Scan Technique:

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-15


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

120kVp, 260 mAs, 0.5 to 4.0 second gantry rotation, 10mm nominal image thickness, 2i
mode reconstruction. Dose is dose per image.
Table 17-9 Table of CTDI free air Dose Value (mGy) at Typical Technique (For 4/8 slices)

Head Body
76.8 64.3

Table 17-10 Table of CTDI free air Dose Value (mGy) at KV Adjustment for Body (For 4/8
slices)

80 22.6
100 42.2
140 88.7

Table 17-11 Table of CTDI free air Dose Value (mGy) at Aperture Adjustment for Body (For 4/8
slice)

2x5mm, 4x2.5mm, 80.5


8x1.25mm
4x1.25mm 100.7
1x1.25mm 184.8
4x3.75mm 68.7

Table 17-12 Table of CTDI free air Dose Value (mGy) at Typical Technique (For 16 slice)

Head Body
76.3 63.9

Scan Technique:
120kVp, 260 mAs, 0.5 to 4.0 second gantry rotation, 10mm nominal image thickness, 2i
mode reconstruction.
Table 17-13 Table of CTDI free air Dose Value (mGy) at KV Adjustment for Body (For 16
slice)

80 22.4
100 41.9
140 88.1

Scan Technique:
260 mAs, 0.5 to 4.0 second gantry rotation, 10mm nominal image thickness, 2i mode
reconstruction.
Table 17-14 Table of CTDI free air Dose Value (mGy) at Aperture Adjustment for Body (For
16 slice)

2x5mm, 8x1.25mm, 79.9


16x.625mm

17-16 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

2x.625mm, 1ix1.25mm 155.8


4x3.75mm 68.2
Scan Technique:
120kVp, 260 mAs, 0.5 to 4.0 second gantry rotation.
CTDIfree air Reproducability: each CTDIfree air value shall be within ±10 % of the mean of a
set of 10 measurements.

Volumetric Helical Scan Image Quality:


With LightSpeed being the first sub-millimeter isotropic CT scanner, GE Medical systems has
defined new specifications: Coronal and Sagittal Image Quality:
1. Visual Measurement:
Reformatted resolution is demonstrated on the Nuclear Associates AAPM High Contrast
Resolution Insert #76-413.
Scan technique is 120kVp, 100 mAs, 0.5 sec scan rotation, 16 x 0.625mm, 0.562:1 pitch,
5.625mm/rotation, 25 cm SFOV, 10 cm DFOV, Detail Algorithm.

0.5mm

An effective 0.5mm voxel size is clearly seen in coronal and sagittal views (2nd smallest
resolution group).
2. Statistic Measurement
Volumetric MTF is computed from the X, Y, and Z axis of a 0.2mm bead using sagittal and
coronal images of the 8¨ Catphan, MTF module with bead source #CTP445.
Scan technique is 120kVp, 100 mAs, 0.5 sec scan rotation, 16 x 0.625mm, 0.562:1 pitch,
5.625mm/rotation, 25 cm SFOV, 10 cm DFOV, Detail Algorithm.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-17


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

MTF (z-axis) is 12.4 lp/cm @ 10%, 15lp/cm @ 0% which is 0.33mm limiting resolution.
X&Y
MTF (X, Y, & Z) Z

% modulation
lp/cm

Subsystem Specifications

Operator Console NIO16


Host Computer
• Quad Intel Xeon E5504 dual 2.00GHz
• 12GB FBD DDR3-1333 REG ECC DIMM

Image Processor
• NVidia Quadro FX1800
• PCI-E

Image Reconstruction Engine (Option: 16fps)


• Special Nvidia QuadroFX 4800c with 1.5GB GDDR3 memory
• Graphics Memory Bandwidth 76.8GB/sec
• PCI express interface
NOTE: Standard configuration (6fps) is using Host recon.
The LightSpeed Series Operator Console user interface features:
• Standard DVD-R/CD-R
– 4.7 GB for DVD-R/650MB for CD-R
– Store up to 7168/1200 uncompressed images
• Two, 19 inch LCD monitors
– Scan/recon monitor mainly for scan and recon control with no image display
– Image monitor mainly for image display, analysis, processing, and management
– Each monitor provides a 1280 x 1024 high resolution, flicker-free display
• Global scan control box assembly with intercom speaker, mic and volume controls
• Three button mouse with mouse pad
• Three button trackball (Option)

17-18 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Operator Console GOC4


• Size: 49 in (1238mm) wide x 40-48 in (1022-1228mm) deep x 29-32.5 in (711-813 mm)
high
• HP XW8000 Technical/Graphics Workstation
• Dual SMP 2.66 GHZ Intel Xeon Processors with 512KB L2 cache
• Intel Hyper-Threading Technology (4 logical processors)
• 2GB DDR266 ECC Dual Channel Memory Standard (4.2 GB/sec)
• SPECfp2000 >900
• SPECint2000 >900
or
• HP XW8200 Technical/Graphics Workstation
• Dual SMP 3.2 GHZ Intel Xeon Processors with 1024KB L2 cache
• Intel Hyper-Threading Technology (4 logical processors)
• 4GB DDR2-400 ECC Dual Channel Memory Standard (6.4 GB/sec)
• SPECfp_rate2000 > 31 (accounts for multiple processors or cores)
• SPECint_rate2000 > 37 (accounts for multiple processors or cores)

Image Processor
• Nvidia Quadro4 980XGL AGP 8X graphics with 128MB Memory
• Graphics Processor Unit (GPU) Clock 300Mhz
• Graphics Memory Clock 325Mhz
• Dual 350Mhz Video RAMDAC's
or
• NVidia Quadro FX1400 PCI-Express 16X Graphics with 128MB Memory
• Graphics memory bandwidth of 19.2 GB/sec
• Dual 400Mhz Video RAMDAC's

Image Reconstruction Engine


• Six frames per second
• Custom-designed, scalable, special purpose CT Image Generator
• Pipelined parallel processing allows 12 views to be
• back-projected simultaneously
• Image Generator consisting of:
– Dual SMP 2.8 GHz Intel Xeon Processors with 512 KB L2 Cache
– Intel Hyper-threading Technology (4 Logical Processors)
– 2 GB DDR 266 ECC Dual Channel Memory Standard (4.2 GB/s)
– 32-bit floating point data format

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-19


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

or
• Image Generator consisting of:
– Dual SMP 2.8 GHz Intel Xeon Processors with 1 MB L2 Cache
– Intel Hyper-threading Technology (4 Logical Processors)
– 2 GB DDR 400 ECC Dual Channel Memory Standard
The LightSpeed Series Operator Console user interface features:
• Two, large 20 inch or 21 inch monitors
– Scan/recon monitor mainly for scan and recon control with no image display
– Image monitor mainly for image display, analysis, processing, and management
– Each monitor provides a 1280 x 1024 high resolution, flicker-free display
• Scan control keyboard assembly with intercom speaker, mic and volume controls
• Three button mouse with mouse pad
• BrightBox (trackball assembly)
• Two wide work surfaces

DAS/Detector
16-Row Detector (For 16 slice)
• 16 rows x 888 active patient elements; 15 reference elements
• 70% geometric efficiency
• 99% absorption efficiency

8-Row Detector (For 4/8 slices)


• 8 rows x 888 active patient elements; 15 reference elements
• 70% geometric efficiency
• 99% absorption efficiency

16-Row DAS (For 16 slice)


• 16 rows x 758 active patient channels; 3 reference
• 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 2, 3, 4 second scan
• 984 - 1640 views per second

8-Row DAS (For 4/8 slices)


• 8 rows x 758 active patient channels; 3 reference
• 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 2, 3, 4 second scan
• 984 - 1408 views per second

17-20 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Table
Load Capacity
• 180 kg (400 lbs) with +/- 0.25mm positional accuracy guaranteed
• 205 kg (450 lbs) maximum allowed with normal operation

Maximum Cradle Travel


• 1703mm
• Table Height, Gantry Tilt and scanning software determine the Scannable range

Cradle Speeds
• 100mm/sec (scout imaging)
• 1.25 - 33.5mm/gantry rotation (helical imaging)

Cradle Attenuation Equivalent


• not more than 2.3mm Al (in compliance with IEC60601-1-3)

Over travel of Cradle In/Out


less than 10 mm

Scan Location Repetition Accuracy


0.25mm

Cradle Positioning Accuracy


1mm (limited by test method, refer to IEC61223-3-5)

Elevation Travel Time


FAST < 30 seconds

Full Range
SLOW < 120 seconds

Elevation Accuracy
1.5mm
Elevation Range
516mm to 991mm above the floor

Gantry
Tilt Limits
+30° to -30°

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-21


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Tilt Speed
60 degrees/min nominal

Over travel of Gantry Tilt


less than 0.5 degree

Gantry Opening Diameter


700mm

Isocenter to Tube Distance


541mm

Tube Focus to Detector Distance


949mm
Tomograghic section thickness (Refer to IEC 61223-3-5 for test method)
• 0.625mmmm
• 1.25mm0.625mm
• 2.5mmmm
• 3.75mmmm
• 5mmmm
• 7.5mmmm
• 10mmmm
Rotational Speeds
360 degrees in 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 2, 3 and 4 seconds

Rotational Freedom
one infinite continuous rotate

X-Ray Tube
Heat Storage
• Anode: 6.3 MHU / 4700 kJ
• Housing: 5.5 MHU / 4100 kJ

Focal Spots
Dual Focal Spots

17-22 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Small Focal Spot


• 0.7 x 0.6 Nominal Focal Spot Value (IEC 336/93)
• 0.9 x 0.7 Nominal Focal Spot Value (IEC 336/2005)

Large Focal Spot


• 0.9 x 0.9 Nominal Focal Spot Value (IEC 336/93)
• 1.2 x 1.1 Nominal Focal Spot Value (IEC 336/2005)

Anode
• Target angle: 7 degrees
• Up to 53.2 kW maximum radiographic load

Laser Alignment Lights


Alignment Light Accuracy (Refer to IEC 61223-3-5 for test method)
Axial alignment light: 1mm
Sagital and Coronal alignment light: 3mm

Maximum Output Power


<1.0 mW/laser beam

Power Supply
5 volt

Maintenance
• Laser alignment lights do not require user maintenance.
• Qualified service personnel must inspect the lights quarterly to assure proper
alignment.

CAUTION: The width of the LIGHT FIELD of Alignment Light is not exceed 3 mm, which is
not represent the actual width of TOMOGRAPHIC SECTION.

Main Power Supply


Line Voltage (Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (3) (i))
• Nominal: Taps selections of 200 to 240 V in 20 V Steps or 380 to 480 V in 20 V Steps
• Daily Variation: Nominal +/- 8%

3-Phase 50/60 Hz +/- 0.5 Hz (Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (3) (i))
• Phase-to-phase balance within 2% of lowest phase-to-phase voltage.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-23


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• Line regulation 6% or less at 90 kVA, 85% P.F.


Maximum 3-Phase Power Demand at Full Rated Output
90 kVA

Maximum Line Current Demand (Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (3) (ii) and (h) (3) (iii))
108A @ 480 V
Maximum line current demand defined at 140 kV and 380 mA.

Generator Subsystem Specifications


Maximum Output Power (Reference IEC 60601-2-44)
53.2 kW power @ 140kV, 380mA
(52.8 kW power @ 120kV, 440mA)

kV Choices
80, 100 120, 140 kV

Maximum mA
440
Regulation
Recovery within 2 kV for 10% line variation in 50msec

Rise Time
< 2 msec, to attain 75% of selected value

Fall Time
< 10 msec to fall below 75% of selected value

Generator Duty Cycle (Reference 21CFR 1020.30 (h) (3) (v))


The generator duty cycle is determined by the tube protection algorithm based on tube type
used.

kV, mA, and Time Accuracy

Kilovolts
kV Selections
80, 100, 120, and 140 kV

17-24 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Basic kVp Accuracy


KVp Accuracy (Mean) = +/-3% (KVp Accuracy (Peak) = +/-(3% + 2KV))
Excludes first 10msec of exposure

Milliamperes
mA Selections
10 to 440 mA, by 5 mA increments
• Patient scanning subject to Scan limitations or 53.2 kW maximum

mA Accuracy
Patient scanning selections of 10 to 440 mA
mA Accuracy = +/- (5% + 0.5mA)

Exposure Time
Normal Axial Scan Selections
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 2, 3, or 4 sec

Cine (Continuous scans without cradle movement)


Up to 120 seconds for a single continuous exposure.

Scout
• Scan range: 50 to 1590mm at 100mm/sec
• Exposure time: exposure time increases proportionally with scan distance selection
exposure time = scan range / table speed + 0.08 sec
Helical (Continuous scans with cradle movement)
Up to 120 seconds for a single continuous exposure.

Exposure Time Accuracy


+/- 5% + 10 ms

Measuring Tool Variance


The above stated accuracies are subject to additional variation due to calibration and
measurement instruments.
kV
kV: +/- 4.5%

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-25


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

mA
mA: +/- 5%

Exposure Time
Time: +/- 3%

Accuracy Subject to Following Conditions


Line Voltages
• Line voltage in specified range for nominal system voltages of 200 to 240V or 380 to
480V.
• Line to line voltages balanced within 2%.

Line Regulation
6% or less.

Transient Voltage Variations Caused by External Loads Must Not:


• Exceed 5%
• Exceed 5 cycles duration
• Occur more than 10 times per hour
To comply with the requirements of 21 CFR 1020.30, accuracies are stated in terms of
maximum theoretical deviation from selectable operating parameters for all technique
factor combinations.
For radiation output, the coefficient of variation is less than 0.05 for successive exposures
with constant technique factors.

Measurement Basis

Kilovolts
Precision 10,000:1 voltage dividers built into system reduce generated anode and cathode
voltages.
Resulting low voltage signals provide continuous closed-loop control of the average kV.
Signals are noise filtered and periodically monitored by the computer system.
Operator console displays monitored values during calibration.
Precision 1000:1 voltage divider, model 46-154966G1, (Catalog # C1515A) provides external
feedback during calibration.
• Calibrate Anode and Cathode signals separately.

17-26 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

• Use a calibrated dual channel oscilloscope with a divider for reference.


• Check calibration of the low voltage kV measuring circuits.
• Average kV values measured by the system are slightly lower than the peak kV during
exposure, due to high frequency ripple in the HV power supplies.
• The difference amplitude, a function of kV and exposure current, always falls within the
stated kVp accuracy.

Milliamperes
Precision shunt resistors, built into the system, measure the tube current component
returned from the secondaries of the
high-voltage transformers.
• The resulting signals provide continuous closed-loop control of the average mA.
• Signals are noise filtered and periodically monitored by the computer system
• Operator console displays the monitored values during calibration.
Check calibration of the shunt resistors and the low voltage mA measuring circuits with a
calibrated digital milliammeter.
Calibrate Anode and Cathode signals separately.

Exposure Time
Traditional Exposure time interval: Duration of time High voltage remains at or above 75% of
selected value.
LightSpeed Series Exposure time interval: Duration of the Expose Command signal within
the Stationary Controller, minus the HV rise time, plus its fall time with respect to the Expose
Command signal.
LightSpeed Series HV components reside on the gantry rotating base.
During stationary scans, use an oscilloscope to measure the HV rise and fall times, with
respect to the Expose Command signal.
Use the oscilloscope to measure the Expose Command signal during stationary scans, to
verify internal time measurements.
Use the internal timer to monitor time during axial/helical scans.
Table 17-15 Symbol and Classification

Symbol Publication Description

~ 417-5032 Alternating Current

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-27


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

~
3 335-1 Three-phase alternating current

3N
~ 335-1
Three-phase alternating current
with neutral conductor

Direct Current

Dangerous voltage

Emergency Stop

417-5339 X-Ray source assembly Emitting

417-5009 Stand by

Start

Microphone (Mic)

Contrast

Brightness

17-28 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

50 C
System storage prior to installation:
Maintain storage temperature between 0 deg. and +30
deg. C (32 deg. and 86 deg. F)

System storage prior to installation:


Maintain non-condensing storage humidity below 70%

Humidity 0-70%
Excluding DO NOT store system longer than 90 days
Condensation
System storage prior to installation:
Air Pressure
Maintain Air Pressure between 750 and 1060hPa.

WEEE

Class 1 Equipment
Any permanently installed equipment containing operator or patient accessible surfaces
must provide backup protection against electric shock, in case the basic insulation fails. In
addition to BASIC INSULATION, Class 1 equipment contains a direct connection to a
PROTECTIVE (EARTH) CONDUCTOR which prevents shocks when a person touches a broken
piece of equipment or touches two different equipment surfaces simultaneously.

Type B Equipment
CLASS 1, 2 or 3 EQUIPMENT or EQUIPMENT WITH INTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES
provide an adequate degree of protection against electric shock arising from (allowable)
LEAKAGE CURRENT or a breakdown in the reliability of the protective earth connection.

Ordinary Equipment
Enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against the ingress of water.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-29


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Operation of Equipment
CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH INTERMITTENT LOADING
Operation in which EQUIPMENT is connected continuously to the SUPPLY MAINS. The stated
permissible loading time is so short that the long term on-load operating temperature is not
attained. The ensuing interval in loading is, however, not sufficiently long for colling down to
the long term no-load operating temperature.
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE
WITH AIR or WITH OXYGEN or NITROGEN OXIDE.

Environmental Specifications
Ratings and duty cycles of all subsystems apply if the site environment complies with the
following.
The specified environment must be constantly maintained, weekends, holidays, and
throughout the night.
Shutdown the CT system whenever the air conditioning fails.
Optional: Turn air conditioner OFF during CT shutdown for repair.

System Cooling Requirements


The cooling requirements do not include cooling for the room lighting, personnel, or non-CT
equipment present. Cooling requirements are listed by subsystem to allow planning for
each room of the CT suite.
Cooling requirements are given for minimum, recommended, and growth allowance
scenarios.
• The minimum cooling figures assume patient throughput of 3 patients per hour and 75
scan rotations per patient.
• The recommended cooling requirements assume patient throughput limited by the tube
cooling algorithm.
• The suite cooling can be sized for future developments by using the growth allowance
figures. This cooling will
accommodate more patients per hour and/or potential future system enhancements.

17-30 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

Minimum Allowance
Subsystem
(Watts / BTU/Hr)
Gantry 5500/18766**
Table 200/682
PDU 1500/5118
Operator Console NIO16 1080/3700
Operator Console GOC4 2400/8189
Optional Laser Camera 800/2730
Recommended cooling values should not be used for calculating
system input power requirements.
** Recommended Allowance: 7200/24566
Growth Allowance: 10400/35485

Temperature and Humidity Specifications

Ambient Temperature
Scan Room
64° - 78° F (18° - 26° C) for patient comfort

Control Room (including Console/Computer)


64° - 78° F (18° - 26° C)

Table and Gantry In Exam Room (when room is unoccupied)


60° - 78° F (15° - 26° C)

Equipment Room (if separate room to hold PDU)


64° - 78° F (18° - 26° C)

Rate of Change
5°F/Hr Max (3°C)

Room Temperature Uniformity


5°F Max Gradient (3°C)
Media (disks/tapes)
Keep long term storage media in the same temperature range as the computer, 60° - 78° F
(15° - 26° C).

Relative Humidity (All Areas)


• 30% - 60% (non-condensing) during operation, all areas.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-31


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

• Rate of Change 5% RH/Hr Max


NOTE: Use a temperature and humidity recorder to monitor the designated system area
during pre-installation and installation, to verify true temperature and humidity
conditions.
NOTE: Refer to your local GE Service for system transportation and storage.
NOTE: Prior to powering on the system, the room environmental operating conditions found
in the System Specification chapter must be maintained for at least 24 hours. These
conditions must be constantly maintained when the system is energized and/or in
use.

Electromagnetic Interference
Consult GE Healthcare for recommendations when the peak 60 Hz/50 Hz field within the
gantry region exceeds 0.01 gauss peak.
Consider the following when trying to reduce suspected Electromagnetic Interference (EMI):
• The external field strength from a source of magnetic field decreases rapidly with the
distance from the source.
• A bank of three single phase transformers generates a smaller magnetic field (less
external leakage) than a three-phase transformer with an equivalent power rating.
• Large electric motors generate substantial EMI.
• Steel reinforcing in the building structure can act as an
effective conductor of EMI.
• High powered radio signals can affect computers.
• No substitute exists for proper screening of cables and cabinets.

Pollution
Individual components contain filters to optimize environmental conditions.
• Keep air pollution to a minimum.
• Keep the CT suite clean at all times.
• Do not have dust and fume generating work near the system.
• Keep component filters clean and free from obstructions.

Cleaning
The system is not waterproof. It is not designed to protect internal components against
ingress of liquids. Clean external system surfaces (gantry, table, console, accessories) with a
soft cloth dipped in hot water and wrung damp/dry. If necessary, use only mild soap to
remove dirt.

17-32 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
System Specif ications

CAUTION: Avoid damage to equipment. Some “spray and wipe” cleaners etch and
permanently cloud clear plastic surfaces. Use only warm water and mild liquid
soap to clean surfaces.

Carpeting
• Install anti-static carpeting - or- treat existing carpets with an anti-static solution.
• Static discharges affect operation and may cause system failures.
Do NOT use steel wool to clean tile floors in scan suite. Fine metal fibers can enter
enclosures and cause internal shorts.

Lighting
Patient Comfort
Use a variable indirect light source between 20 – 100 foot candles in the scan room

Control Room
Select and position subdued light to reduce monitor reflections, and prevent operator eye
strain

Equipment Room
Provide a bright light source for use during maintenance.

Altitude
• Minimum Altitude: 100 feet (30.5 meters) below sea level
• Maximum Altitude: 7,500 feet (2287 m) above sea level

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 17-33


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

17-34 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Planned Maintenance

Chapter 18
Planned Maintenance

The following chart gives a description, and frequency of Planned Maintenance (P.M.)
procedures. Please refer to Direction 2141834-100 for the details of each P.M. procedure
and P.M. report charts. LightSpeed Series PMs are based on gantry revolutions.
PMs will be done every 250k gantry revolutions. The average LightSpeed Series scanner
does 1,000,000 revolutions per year, therefore the average scanner has approximately four
Planned Maintenance activities per year.
Table 18-1 LightSpeed Series PM Schedule (based on 1000k revolution cycle/year)

Sub- System Description Schedule Schedule Schedule Schedule


A B C D
Console Check for smooth rolling X X X X
trackball/mouse
Gantry Check the number of gantry X X X X
revolutions
Gantry Grease main bearing X
Gantry Check drive belt for wear X
Gantry Check scan and laser windows X X X X
Gantry Clean ventilation holes and X X X X
check fans
Gantry Handling & removal of slip ring X X X X
brush debris
Gantry Clean or replace tube fan filter X X X X
Gantry Slip ring vacuuming X X X X
High Voltage mA meter verification X
High Voltage kV test (HHS) X
High Voltage HV tank feedback resistors X
calibration
High Voltage Total kV measurement X
High Voltage kV Meter verification X
High Voltage Auto mA calibration X
High Voltage mA and kV verification (HHS) X

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 18-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Sub- System Description Schedule Schedule Schedule Schedule


A B C D
High Voltage Verify rise and fall times (HHS) X
High Voltage Verification of internal scan X
timer (HHS)
PDU Inspect/clean filter X X X X
PDU Inspect green indicator lamp X X X X
on PDU
PDU Check tightness of wire lugs X
System Verify emergency off buttons X X X X
(table/console)
System System Check X-Ray on lights X X X X
(HHS)
System Check operation of final scan X X X X
abort pushbuttons
System Image performance QA X
System Monitor system logs X X X X
System General cleaning X X X X
System Update site log X X X X
Table Upper assembly PM X
Table Lower assembly PM X
Table Check for wear or damage on X X X X
table extensions
Schedule A - PM Cycle begins when Revolution Counter shows xxx250k revolutions
Schedule B - Next 250k Revolutions when Revolution Counter shows xxx500k revolutions
Schedule C - Next 250k Revolutions when Revolution Counter shows xxx750k revolutions
Schedule D - Next 250k Revolutions when Revolution Counter increments a million
revolutions
The Laser Camera is normally not considered to be part of the CT system. However, a
schedule for Planned Maintenance for the camera is included in the following table, and
procedures for Planned Maintenance for the GE Lasercamera are contained in the PM
Manual (Direction 2141834-100).
Table 18-2 Laser Camera

Sub- System Description Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter


1 2 3 4
Laser 3M Laser Camera Maintenance X X
Camera

NOTE: Laser Camera PM’s are based on a Quarterly Schedule (2 PM’s per year) vs. PM’s which are
based on Gantry revolutions.

18-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Product Manufacturer

Chapter 19
Product Manufacturer

This chapter lists the manufacturer of the LightSpeedTM Series product. The manufacturer
listed is authorized to CE mark the product listed.
Table 19-1 Product Manufacturer

Manufacturer
Model Name Manufacturer address
Manufacturing Site
West Area of Building No.3, No.1
Yongchang North Road,
GE HANGWEI MEDICAL
SYSTEMS CO., LTD Beijing Economic and
Technological Development Area,
BEIJING 100176 CHINA
LightSpeed Plus GE Healthcare Japan
Corporation (previously 7-127, Asahigaoka 4-chome
named GE Yokogawa Hino-Shi, Tokyo 191-8503, Japan
Medical Systems, LTD).
3000 N. Grandview Blvd.,
GE Medical Systems, LLC
Waukesha, WI 53188, U.S.A.
West Area of Building No.3, No.1
Yongchang North Road,
GE HANGWEI MEDICAL
SYSTEMS CO., LTD Beijing Economic and
Technological Development Area,
BEIJING 100176 CHINA
LightSpeed Ultra GE Healthcare Japan
Corporation (previously 7-127, Asahigaoka 4-chome
named GE Yokogawa Hino-Shi, Tokyo 191-8503, Japan
Medical Systems, LTD).
3000 N. Grandview Blvd.,
GE Medical Systems, LLC
Waukesha, WI 53188, U.S.A.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 19-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

West Area of Building No.3, No.1


Yongchang North Road,
GE HANGWEI MEDICAL
SYSTEMS CO., LTD Beijing Economic and
Technological Development Area,
BEIJING 100176 CHINA
LightSpeed16 GE Healthcare Japan
Corporation (previously 7-127, Asahigaoka 4-chome
named GE Yokogawa Hino-Shi, Tokyo 191-8503, Japan
Medical Systems, LTD).
3000 N. Grandview Blvd.,
GE Medical Systems, LLC
Waukesha, WI 53188, U.S.A.

19-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Abbreviations

Chapter 20
Abbreviations

Abbreviations Acronym

ASiR Adaptive Statistical Iterative Reconstruction

AW Advantage Workstation

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

CISPR International special committee on Radio Interference

CRT Cathode Ray Tube

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CT Computed Tomography

CTDI Computed Tomography Dose Index

CW Clockwise

DAS Data Acquisition System

DFOV Display Field of View

DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine

DLP Dose Length Product

ECG or EKG Electro cardiogram

EFUP Environment-friendly Use Period

EHS Environmental Health and Safety

EMC Electro-magnetic Compatibility

EMI Electro-magnetic Immunity

FAQ Frequently Asked Questions

FBDIMM Fully Buffered Dual Inline Memory Module

FWHM Full Width Half Maximum

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 20-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Abbreviations Acronym

FWTM Full Width Tenth Maximum

HU Hounsfield Units

HV High Voltage

HVL Half Value Layer

IEC International Electro-technical Commission

IGD Inter-group Delay

IPD Inter-patient Delay

ISD Inter-scan Delay

IV Intra-venous

kV kilo-volts

kW kilo-watts

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LCD Low Contrast Detectability

mA milli-amps (current)

mAs milli-amps X seconds (current x seconds)

MDC Main Disconnect Control

MTF Modulation Transfer Function

NCRP National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements

OC Operator’s Console

PDU Power Distribution Unit

PM Planned Maintenance

PMMA Poly-methyl methacrylate

QA Quality Assurance

QEF Quality Equivalent Filtration

QSR Quality System Regulation

RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks

RAM Random Access Memory

RAS Right/Left, Anterior/Posterior, Superior/Inferior

RF Radio Frequency

ROI Region of Interest

ROM Read Only Memory

20-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Abbreviations

Abbreviations Acronym

SATA Serial Advance Technology Attachment

SCIM Scan Control Intercom Module

Sec. or "s" Second

SFOV Scan Field of View

SSP Slice Sensitivity Profile

UL Underwriters’ Laboratories

WL Window Level

WW Window Width

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) 20-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

20-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix A
Reference Noise Index

Table A-1 Configured to deliver lower noise in the images at a higher mA value

10.0 7.5 5.0 3.75 2.5 1.25 0.625


Anatomy Mode
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
1 Head Normal 2.20 2.40 2.80 3.00 3.80 5.20 7.00
2 Orbit Normal 2.20 2.40 2.80 3.00 3.80 5.20 7.00
3 Neck Normal 5.20 5.72 6.63 7.02 9.10 12.22 12.60
4 Upper Normal 7.80 8.58 9.88 10.66 13.52 18.33 19.00
5 Chest Normal 7.80 8.58 9.88 10.66 13.52 18.33 19.00
6 Abdomen Normal 7.80 8.58 9.88 10.66 13.52 18.33 19.00
7 Spine Normal 7.80 8.58 9.88 10.66 13.52 18.33 19.00
8 Pelvis Normal 7.80 8.58 9.88 10.66 13.52 18.33 19.00
9 Lower Normal 7.80 8.58 9.88 10.66 13.52 18.33 19.00
10 Misc Normal 7.80 8.58 9.88 10.66 13.52 18.33 19.00

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) A-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Table A-2 Configured to deliver average noise in the images at an average mA value

10.0 7.5 5.0 3.75 2.5 1.25 0.625


Anatomy Mode
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

1 Head Normal 2.20 2.40 2.80 3.00 3.80 5.20 7.00


2 Orbit Normal 2.20 2.40 2.80 3.00 3.80 5.20 7.00
3 Neck Normal 5.20 5.72 6.63 7.02 9.10 12.22 12.60
4 Upper Normal 9.10 10.01 11.57 12.35 15.86 21.45 22.10
5 Chest Normal 9.10 10.01 11.57 12.35 15.86 21.45 22.10
6 Abdomen Normal 9.10 10.01 11.57 12.35 15.86 21.45 22.10
7 Spine Normal 9.10 10.01 11.57 12.35 15.86 21.45 22.10
8 Pelvis Normal 9.10 10.01 11.57 12.35 15.86 21.45 22.10
9 Lower Normal 9.10 10.01 11.57 12.35 15.86 21.45 22.10
10 Misc Normal 9.10 10.01 11.57 12.35 15.86 21.45 22.10

Table A-3 Configured to deliver higher noise in the images at a lower mA value

10.0 7.5 5.0 3.75 2.5 1.25 0.625


Anatomy Mode
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
1 Head Normal 2.20 2.40 2.80 3.00 3.80 5.20 7.00
2 Orbit Normal 2.20 2.40 2.80 3.00 3.80 5.20 7.00
3 Neck Normal 5.20 5.72 6.63 7.02 9.10 12.22 12.60
4 Upper Normal 10.40 11.44 13.13 14.17 18.07 24.57 25.30
5 Chest Normal 10.40 11.44 13.13 14.17 18.07 24.57 25.30
6 Abdomen Normal 10.40 11.44 13.13 14.17 18.07 24.57 25.30
7 Spine Normal 10.40 11.44 13.13 14.17 18.07 24.57 25.30
8 Pelvis Normal 10.40 11.44 13.13 14.17 18.07 24.57 25.30
9 Lower Normal 10.40 11.44 13.13 14.17 18.07 24.57 25.30
10 Misc Normal 10.40 11.44 13.13 14.17 18.07 24.57 25.30

A-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix B
Dose Information Reference

Table B-1 Learning and Reference Guide

Chapter Title
CTDIVOL
2
Pediatric and Small Patient Imaging

3 Imaging Pediatric and Small Patients


5 Dose Reports
Reference Noise Index and Noise Index
Values
Auto mA
9 mA Control
SmartmA
Auto mA FAQ’s
ASiR
23 Set Scan Parameters

Table B-2 Technical Reference Manual

Chapter Title
2 Radiation Protection
CTDIVOL
3
Pediatric and Small Patient Imaging
11 Scan Parameters
17 ASiR

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) B-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Chapter Title
Dosimetry
Dose Profile
12
Radiation Protection
Radiation Field
13 Dose

B-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Appendix C
Purchasable Options

Table C-1 Options

Operator Software Option Catalog Item


Data Sheet Name
Instruction Name Name Description Name
SmartScore Pro
SmartScore Pro SmartScore Pro Acquisition SmartScore Pro
Software
ECG Trace on OC ECG Trace ECG
ECG Viewer EKG Viewer
Software Viewer
Advanced Statistical
Iterative
ASiR ASiR ASiR
Reconstruction
(ASiR)
SmartStep SmartStep SmartStep SmartStep
Xtream Injector
Xtream Injector Xtream Injector Xtream Injector
Interface
Enhanced Xtream Enhanced Xtream Enhanced Xtream Enhanced Xtream
Injector Injector Injector Injector Interface
Volume Viewer 3.1 VolumeViewer Volume Viewer Volume Viewer 3.1
AUTOBONE FOR
AutoBone Xpress AutoBone AutoBone Xpress
VV3.1 ON OC
AVA Xpress - VV3.1
AVA Xpress AdvVesselAnalysis AVA Xpress
on OC
CTC Pro on the
Advantage CTC Pro CTColonoPro Advantage CTC Pro
Xtream Console
Perfusion 4 Neuro
CT Perfusion 4 CT Perfusion 4
CT Perfusion 4 software for CT
Neuro Neuro
Operators Console

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) C-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

Perf 4 M.O. -VV3.1 CT Perfusion 4 Multi


CT Perfusion 4 CT Perfusion 4
on OC Organ
DentaScan for
Advantage
DentaScan Linux LightSpeed DentaScan
Dentascan
Operator's Console
Advantage 4D Advantage 4D
Enhanced Recon

Option Descriptions
The following table describes the function of the system options.
Option Descriptions
Table C-2 Option Descriptions

Operator Instruction
Function Description
Name
An advanced reconstruction technique that enables reduction
Advanced Statistical in image noise and improvement in low contrast detectability
Iterative Reconstruction (LCD) and image quality. ASiR Review provides the ability to
(ASiR) review and assist you in determining the desired level of noise
reduction.
Acquires prospective ECG gating measurements, which
provide information that is valuable for scan timing. Using the
SmartScore Pro
measurements, the system synchronizes the collection of data
with the cardiac cycle.
Provides users the capability to view ECG waveform displayed
ECG Viewer
on the console.
A mode of scanning designed to be used by the Radiologist or
Physician during interventional procedures.Accomplished by
SmartStep
using the integrated Hand Held Controller (HHC) and foot
switch.
Enables Class1 functionality on a CiA425 complaint injector
Xtream Injector allowing only ON/OFF control. Xtream Injector is a start
synchronization of system and injector.
En Enables Class4 functionality on a CiA425 complaint injector
allowing ON/OFF and injector parameters to be set from the
Enhanced Xtream Injector system. Enhanced Xtream Injector is a start synchronization of
the system and injector and injection parameter
communication between the system and injector.
VolumeViewer provides protocols for reformat, 3D rendering
Volume Viewer 3.1
and volume rendering.

C-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Facilitates removal of bone and the table from CTA studies of
AutoBone Xpress
the abdomen and lower extremities.
Provides enhanced analysis of vascular features, which
AVA Xpress include stenosis analysis, pre/post stent planning procedures
and directional vessel tortuosity visualization.
Provides comprehensive software package for evaluation of
Advantage CTC Pro quick, accurate, noninvasive colon exams. This feature may
also be called Advantage CTC Colon VCAR in the manuals.
Package includes protocols for neuro stroke and brain tumor
CT Perfusion 4
perfusion.
Multi-organ package includes protocols for neuro stroke and
CT Perfusion 4 tumor perfusion imaging and body tumor including liver
perfusion imaging.
Allow specific analysis to aid in the pre-surgical evaluation of
Advantage Dentascan
dental implants.
Provides the capability of binning the 4D images and also the
Advantage 4D
4D images review.
Enhanced Recon Enables higher image reconstruction speed.

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) C-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
LightSpeed TM Series

This page intentionally left blank.

C-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Numerics DAS
1 1-2 Data Collection 11-25
4Row DAS Data Collection 11-25
Subsystem Specifications 17-20 General information 11-25
Data Storage 11-30
A General information 11-30
Address Detector window 7-1
CT Service Engineering 1-4 DICOM Print 11-2
Alignment Light Disk Space 8-1
Alignment Light Accuracy test 12-15 Disk space 8-1
Subsystem Specifications 17-23 Display
Axial 11-21 General information 11-31
Dose
C Accumulated Exam DLP 3-19
Calibration Dose Length Product 3-19
General information 11-30 Projected Series DLP 3-19
Calibration Modes 11-23 Dosimetry and Performance
Calibration Scans 11-29 Maximum Deviation 12-43
CAM Collimator 11-17 MTF 12-42, 12-44
Channel Utilization Table - Full Modes 11-27 Noise 12-34, 12-44
Check Disk Space 8-1 Nominal Slice Thickness 12-37
Image space 8-1 Sensitivity Profile 12-44
Clever Gain Calibration 6-1
Collimator Theory 11-19 E
CT Electromagnetic Interference 17-32
General information 11-1 Emergency Stop 11-1
Operation Theory 11-2 Environmental Specifications 14-2, 14-17, 17-30
CT Description 11-1 Altitude 17-33
CT Number 11-32 Ambient Temperature 17-31
General information 11-32 EMI 17-32
Pixels and CT Numbers 11-36 Lighting 17-33
System Performance 12-8 Pollution 17-32
Window Width 11-37 Relative Humidity 17-31
CT Safety 3-12 System Cooling Requirements 17-30
CT/i Performix X-Ray Tube Environmen?l ?ecifica?ons
Tube Model and Catalog Numbers 14-1, Media s?rage 17-31
14-17
Current X-Ray Tube Capacity Effects F
Prescriptions and Interscan Delays 11-24 Fast Cal 6-1
Fast Calibration 6-1
D Fastcal
Daily Fastcal Procedure 6-1 Daily procedure 6-1
Daily Prep 6-1 Filament Selection 11-24

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) Index-1


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Filament Selection Table 11-24 Milliamperes 17-25, 17-27
Focal Spot 11-24 Gray Scale 11-31
FPA Check Scans 6-1 General information 11-31

G H
Gantry Helical 11-21
Subsystem Specifications 17-21 Helical Overview 11-21
Gantry Coordinate System 11-16 Helical Scan Data Usage 11-27
GE 1-2 Help 1-2
General Information 11-1
Calibration Scans 11-30 I
CT Description 11-1 Image Display 11-31
CT Number 11-32 Image Quality
CT Operation Theory 11-2 Calibration and Scan Image Quality 12-3
Data Collection 11-25 Maintain image quality 5-1, 6-1
Data Storage 11-30 Phantom Image Test and Analysis
DFOV and Pixel Size 11-35 System Performance 12-7
Filament Selection and Scan Thickness QA Schedule
11-24 QA Procedure 12-3
Filament Selection Table 11-24 System Performance
Focal Spot 11-24 System Performance 12-5
Gray Scale 11-31 Image Space 8-1
Image Display 11-31 Image space 8-1
Pixel Coordinates 11-33 Interventional / Biopsy Scanning 3-37
Pixels 11-33
Pixels and CT Numbers 11-36 K
RAS coordinates 11-34 kV
Reconstruction 11-26 Accuracy 17-24
Tube Warmup 11-3 accuracy 17-25
Variables you cannot control 11-33 Measurement Basis 17-26
Window Width 11-37
X-Ray 11-2 L
X-Ray Tube Capacity Learning and Reference Manual 4-1
X-Ray Tube 11-24 Limited Access Room Configuration
General information 3-51
X-Ray 11-2
Generator Specifications 17-24 M
Exposure Time 17-25, 17-27 mA
Kilovolts 17-24, 17-26 Accuracy 17-25
kV, mA and Time Accuracy 17-24 Measurement Basis 17-27
Main Power Supply 17-23 Maintain Image Quality 12-5
Measurement Basis 17-26 Matrix
Measuring tool variance 17-25 Pixel Coordinates 11-33

Index-2 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Maximum Symmentrical Radiation Field 12-50 Pixels and CT Numbers 11-36
MDC 10-5 Planned Maintenance
Mean 11-36 Console 18-1
Media HV System 18-1
Media ?orage ?ecifica?ons 17-31 PM Schedule 18-1
Model Numbers 17-1, 17-6 Premium Image Quality Helical Example 11-22
Modulation Transfer Function (MTF) Prepare the System
MTF 12-42 Overview sheet 7-1
MTF 12-42
Maximum Deviation 12-44 Q
MTF test 12-9 QA 12-1
Mylar ring 7-1 Position the phantom 12-5
Mylar Window Check 6-1 QA Phantom 12-1
QA Procedure 12-1
N Center QA Phantom in FOV 12-5
Noise 12-34 Copy the QA Data form 12-1
Maximum Deviation 12-44 Prescribe the QA Series 12-6, 12-14, 12-16
Nominal Helical Slice Thickness 11-28 QA Schedule 12-3
System Performance
P System Performance 12-5
Pediatric Imaging 11-21 Typical Results & Variations 12-18
Periodic Maintenance 18-1, 19-1 QA Schedule 12-3
Phantom Quality Assurance
Alignment Light Accuracy test 12-15 Image Quality 12-1
Center Phantom in FOV 12-5 QA Procedure 12-1
Contrast Scale test 12-7 System Performance
High Contrast Spatial Resolution test 12-8 System Performance 12-5
Low Contrast Detectability test 12-10
MTF test 12-9 R
Noise and Uniformity test 12-11 Radiation
Phantoms and Procedures 12-33 HSA Standard Tube scatter survey
QA Phantom description 12-1 using body filter 12-46
Slice Thickness test 12-12 Radiation Protection 12-45
Test and Analyze QA Phantom Images 12-7 RAS
Phone numbers 1-2 Annotation 11-35
Pixel Coordinates 11-33 Coordinates 11-34
Pixels 11-33 RAS Coordinates 11-34
DFOV and Pixel Size 11-35 Reconstruction 11-26
General information 11-33 General information 11-26
Pixel Coordinates 11-33 Reset 9-1
Pixels and CT Numbers 11-36 Reset Procedures 9-1
RAS Coordinates 11-34
Window Width 11-37

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) Index-3


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
S Maximum Deviation 12-43
Safety 3-60, 15-1 MTF 12-9, 12-42, 12-44
Radiation Protection 12-45 Noise 12-34, 12-44
Scan Duration Noise and Uniformity 12-11
Accuracy 17-25 Phantoms and Procedures 12-33
Measurement Basis 17-27 Radiation Protection 12-45
Scan Parameters 11-26 Sensitivity Profile 12-44
Scan Thickness Slice Thickness 12-12
Filament Selection Determines Range Typical Results & Variations 12-18
11-24 System Shutdown 9-1
Nominal Slice Thickness 12-37 System Specifications
Slice Thickness test 12-12 CT Scan Ratings 14-3
Scan Time Diagnostic Source Assembly 14-2, 14-18
Duration and accuracy 17-25 Environment 14-2, 14-17
Scout 11-20 Environment See Environmental
Sensitivity Specifications 17-30
Maximum Deviation 12-44 Generator Subsystem 17-24
Slice Thickness Full Mode 11-28 kV, mA and Time Accuracy 17-24
Slice Thickness Plus Modes 11-29 Measurement Basis 17-26
Space on Disks Measuring tool variance 17-25
Maintain Image Space 8-1 Model Numbers 17-1, 17-6
Spatial Resolution 12-8 Performix Ultra Tube Assembly 14-4
Standard Deviation 11-36 Performix Ultra Tube Insert 14-8
Start Up 7-1, 10-1 Subsystem Specifications See Subsystem
Subsystem Specifications Specifications 17-18
4Row DAS 17-20 System Dimensions 17-8
Detector 17-20 Target Load in Kilowatts table 14-3
Gantry 17-21 System Warmup 5-1
Generator Subsystem 17-24
Laser Alignment Lights 17-23 T
Table 17-21 Table
X-Ray Tube 17-22 Subsystem Specifications 17-21
System components 11-1 Temperature & Humidity Specifications 17-31
System Data and Control Flow 11-15 Tube Warmup 5-1, 11-3
System Dimensions 17-8 General information 11-3
System Operational Modes 11-20 Two hours elapse between exams 5-1
System Performance 12-5
Alignment Light Accuracy 12-15 V
Analyze the QA Images 12-7 Variables You Cannot Control 11-33
Contrast Scale 12-7 Variables you cannot control 11-33
High Contrast Spatial Resolution 12-8
Low Contrast Detectability 12-10 W
Maintain Image Quality 12-5 Warmup 5-1, 6-1

Index-4 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Warm-up Required 11-30
Warmup Required 11-30
Window Level 11-37
Window Width 11-37
General information 11-37
Pixels and CT Numbers 11-37

X
X-Ray
General information 11-2
X-ray Generation and Detection Details 11-16
X-Ray Tube
Filament Selection 11-24
Filament Selection Table 11-24
Focal Spot 11-24
X-Ray Tube Capacity 11-24
X-Ray Tube Specifications 17-22
CT Scan Ratings 14-3
Diagnostic Source Assembly 14-2, 14-18
Performix Ultra Tube Assembly 14-4
Performix Ultra Tube Insert 14-8

Z
Z-Axis Cell Summation 11-18

5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016) Index-5


© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Index-6 5478900-2-1EN Rev. 3 (October 2016)
© 2016 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
www.gehealthcare.com

Imagination at work

You might also like